JP7464402B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a technology has been proposed in which a vibration means is provided on the ball launching handle (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-38019 A

The technology described in Patent Document 1 leaves room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest of the vibration-based effects.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that enhances the entertainment value of the game when vibration effects are used.

(A) A gaming machine that can variably display performance identification information and control the game to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A performance control means capable of executing a performance,
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect can be executed after the reach effect is started,
a predetermined vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to a start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed and a second timing prior to the start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed;
A special vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means during a specific effect period, which is an execution period of the specific effect.
A light emitting effect can be executed in which the operation means is illuminated in the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect,
As the special vibration effect,
A first special vibration effect corresponding to the operation of a movable body for effect different from the operation means can be executed at a timing when the specific effect is started during the specific effect period,
A second special vibration effect corresponding to the image display during the specific effect period can be executed,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed;
The predetermined vibration effect and the first special vibration effect have different aspects,
The predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects,
The first special vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects,
The performance control means is capable of executing the light-emitting performance by a common light-emitting mode at the first timing and the second timing,
The light emission performance accompanying the execution of the first special vibration performance and the light emission performance accompanying the execution of the second special vibration performance have different light emission modes.
It is characterized by:
Furthermore, (1) in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information, and is equipped with an operation means (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates, the vibration effect being a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving of a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., a vibration included in a variable display effect control pattern). a vibration effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the performance process during variable display in step S172 using vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) and a light emission effect execution means (e.g., a light control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) that executes a light emission effect (e.g., light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 with a light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern) that causes the operation unit to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect. and a specific performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 which executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing specific performances (e.g., a reach performance of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc.) in accordance with the progress of the game (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 which executes the variable display performance process of step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203, etc.), and the rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state is higher (e.g., a jackpot signal corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern, etc.) when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed. the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission state of the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the application of the operation unit performance pattern), the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration state differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.),
Furthermore, the game machine is provided with a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a portion that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19), and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13), and the state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means in response to the special number of times. The numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the specified value (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 8-17, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173), and the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71).
According to this configuration, the player can be attracted to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect, thereby improving the interest of the player. Furthermore, the player can be rescued in a suitable manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any of the identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, so the player can be rescued more easily, and the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the following means A. Conventionally, gaming machines that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, as shown in JP 2005-95449 A, have been known. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that when the number of special game games (number of executions of variable display) executed in a normal gaming state reaches 1000 times (special number of times) but no jackpot (advantageous state) occurs (special condition is established), the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, the probability that a jackpot is determined to be the result of the special game is increased to about 1/100, and a jackpot is more likely to occur in the subsequent special game. Patent Document 1 also describes that when the number of special game games (number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times in a normal gaming state but no jackpot occurs, a time-saving state may be generated instead of the high probability state.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there was insufficient consideration given to the interest generated when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a special number, or in the period before and after this.

Therefore, the purpose of this invention is to provide an entertaining gaming machine.

(Means A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19), and The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS75 and 100IWS76 in the game control microcomputer 100). the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); a predetermined suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined suggestion performance (for example, a notice performance) when the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-49, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120); and a control means for notifying the user that control of a special state is started based on the establishment of a special condition. The display device further includes a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, changing the background image as shown in Figures 14-52 (C1) and (C2), blacking out when the fluctuation starts as shown in Figure 14-53 (B), or blacking out when the fluctuation ends as shown in Figure 14-54 (C)) to notify the user of a certain condition (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638 as shown in Figure 14-23), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing predetermined suggestion effects in the period before the special condition is established (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in Figure 14-44. See Figure 14-50).
According to such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his/her interest.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol determination process. A figure showing an example of settings for the setting suggestion performance execution decision table. A figure showing configuration examples and setting examples regarding setting suggestion patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. A diagram showing an example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. A front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic portion 10SH. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of a jackpot. A figure showing an example of the execution timing and performance period of a vibration effect and a visual guidance effect. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A diagram showing an example configuration of a performance device for characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. A figure showing an example of settings when executing an operation unit performance pattern and a specific linked performance. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing settings of vibration patterns. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance using vibration and light emission. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting a continuous performance pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting the timing at which an operation unit performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. A figure showing an example of the execution of a presentation in which a game effect lamp is illuminated. A figure showing an example of setting a performance period during which a specific linked performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of music playback execution. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. A front view of a pachinko game machine in characteristic portion 108IW. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the probability of a jackpot and the probability of losing the time-saving function for each setting value. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the probability of a jackpot and the probability of losing the time-saving function for each setting value. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining types of time saving. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 108IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 108IW. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main processing in characteristic section 108IW. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in characteristic portion 108IW. A flowchart showing a specific example of the main processing for performance control in characteristic unit 108IW. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo performance control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a caption display execution lottery table and a caption mode determination lottery table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of a caption displayed while waiting for customers. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading notice setting process. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading preview performance execution decision table, a pre-reading preview performance type decision table, and a pre-reading preview performance mode decision table. This is an explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of each type of preview performance. This is a time chart to explain the period of change in the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue, and the period of execution of the pre-reading preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is a timing chart to explain the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the time-saving entry appearance presentation. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of the presentation aspects of false countdown presentations and effect presentations. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process in the first modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in Modification 1. 13 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process in the first modified example. This is a timing chart to explain the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in variant example 1. An explanatory diagram for explaining variants 2 to 4 of the method of selecting a fluctuation pattern during a time-saving state based on rescue time-saving. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process in Example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process in the second embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table in Example 2. A timing chart for explaining the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in variant example 1 of Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in variant example 2 of Example 2.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) is provided that is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning openings (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the second start winning opening (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning openings (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 may display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold up to a specified upper limit (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of the features related to the setting suggestion production)
Hereinafter, a description will be given of a characteristic feature relating to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this characteristic feature, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate can be executed while the variable display is being executed.

Figure 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the performance control process as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting processing, a stop pattern determination processing is executed (step S201). In the stop pattern determination processing, a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative patterns, such as the final stop pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns, is determined. Following the stop pattern determination processing, a preview performance determination processing is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination processing makes it possible to determine the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special chart change performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling the execution of various performances. For example, one of the multiple prepared special chart change performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command. Also, one of the multiple prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. Note that the special chart change performance control pattern and the preview performance control pattern are not limited to being set as separate performance control patterns, and one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings for each performance may be set.

When the performance control pattern is determined in step S203, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, for example (step S204). Also, settings are made to start the variation of the decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special pattern variation) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control section 123, and the variation of the decorative patterns can be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (consumed), and the pending displays in the display parts corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4", etc. are moved (shifted) one by one to the left. This shifts the pending display. In the active display part provided on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display corresponding to the pending display erased (consumed) in the pending display area may be performed. Note that when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second start winning, the setting for updating the active display in the active display area may be performed without updating the pending display. After that, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the performance process during the variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stopping symbol determination process. In the stopping symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed (step S221). Whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed can be determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the reach performance of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop pattern in the case of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop pattern determination process is terminated. In the case of non-reach, the variable display result is "miss". In the case of normal reach, the variable display result includes the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" and the case where the variable display result is "miss". In the case of non-reach, where the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not a reach state, the final stop pattern is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination. The final stop pattern in the case of non-reach is determined to be different (mismatched) decorative patterns in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. In the case of normal reach, where the variable display result is "miss", the final stop pattern in the case of reach miss is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a missed reach is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In the event of a normal reach where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is the confirmed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop pattern at the time of the super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of the super reach, the variable display result may be either a "jackpot" or a "miss." At the time of the super reach where the variable display result is a "miss," the final stop pattern at the time of the reach miss is the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. At the time of the jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the jackpot.

During a super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed as fixed decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such a reach miss combination or a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbols that can be determined as reach symbols may include multiple types of decorative symbols, such as seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers may be only performance images showing the numbers, or may be performance images showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol may be determined as one of multiple decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol. The numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative symbols that become the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol decreases as the numbers 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are reached, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the lowest. In contrast, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol increases as the numbers 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are reached, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the highest. In such a determination ratio setting, when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest, and as the numbers 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2 are displayed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state decreases, and when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. In addition, in the reach pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "jackpot", the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be the same. The number of judgment values assigned to each decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be different, or the number of judgment values assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern. The determination ratio of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may differ depending on the type of jackpot.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop pattern determination process is terminated. If the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (step S225). The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, or "effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the result of the determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226). If "effect" has been determined, in which no setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226; No), the process of determining the symbols to be stopped is terminated. If "effect" has been determined (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is identified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and stores the notified setting value in a specified area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 is identified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and the stopping symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern may be determined to be one of a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, for example, by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in ROM 121, based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122.

Figure 10-3 shows an example of a setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, in the ROM 121, table data constituting the decision table TA01 shown in Figure 10-3 is stored in advance as the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the decision table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect varies depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the decision ratio of "present" to execute the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "miss". In such a setting ratio setting, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Note that in the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot".

Figure 10-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as multiple setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether the symbol display color is changed and, if changed, the display color. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to suggestion display colors including copper, silver, and gold in addition to the normal display color red. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the expectation level is low, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting that the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to give suggestions regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on whether the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

Figure 10-4 (B) shows an example of settings for the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in Figure 10-4 (B) is pre-stored in ROM 121 as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stopping symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by, for example, referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are portions where the number of judgment values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion effect using a reach pattern is executed, the reach pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, so there is a high probability of control to a jackpot game state. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is high, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-3, the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, the reach pattern when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode includes a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, and a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, and suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In the case where the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed to continue giving a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state and also giving a suggestion regarding the setting value.

The setting suggestion presentation can be executed so that the presentation mode differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, and the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to copper, or not, differs. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, and the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6, whether the symbol display color is changed to gold, or not, differs.

Instead of or in addition to changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect may be to change any aspect of the reach state, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol. Alternatively, it may be to change the performance mode by any performance device, such as displaying a background image, an outer frame image, or any other performance image, outputting sound from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting up decorative light-emitting bodies such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operating performance movable members, or a combination of some or all of these. The setting suggestion effect and other optional performances in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executable when any data related to performance control, any data not related to performance control, or a combination of these satisfies a single or multiple conditional expressions previously determined for performance execution. A performance that changes the symbol display color is also called a change performance.

The multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and patterns that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 may be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is a "miss," whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is a "jackpot," and cannot be determined when the variable display result is a "miss." In this case, pattern RE-2 may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 may be determined at a different rate depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Figure 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing as the variable display performance processing. In the variable display performance processing, it is determined whether or not the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the performance control process timer (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various performances as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting processing. These commands are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, etc. This allows a variety of effects to be produced by a given performance device, such as displaying a given performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, outputting a given sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on, off or blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operating movable components for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step S242). If it is the advance notice performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the advance notice performance (step S243). If it is not the advance notice performance period (step S242; No) or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach performance period (step S244). If it is the reach performance period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the reach performance (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the reach performance is executed after the pattern display color is changed, it is possible to provide suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state and to provide suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1.

If it is not the reach performance period (step S244; No) or after the control of step S245 has been performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be determined in advance as a performance execution period in which the pattern display color is changed when a setting suggestion performance using a reach pattern is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No) or after the control of step S247 has been performed, control is performed to execute performance during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on, for example, the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, and then the variable display performance processing ends.

The change performance period may be set to a different time length depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change performance period may be set to the shortest first period, in the case of pattern RE-1, the change performance period may be set to the second period longer than the first period, in the case of pattern RE-2, the change performance period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change performance period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when a performance that notifies an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player tends to take an image or video of the performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player and post it on a member registration website such as a social networking service (SNS) or an Internet video supply site. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous performance is short, a problem occurs in that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for a performance (unfavorable performance) that is often performed even in unfavorable cases, there is a problem that a long execution period of the unfavorable performance gives a player a sense of discomfort because it does not stimulate the desire to take a photo. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to ensure time for shooting, and the execution period of unfavorable effects is shortened to reduce discomfort. This prevents the player from missing an advantageous effect when it is executed, and also ensures time for shooting. Furthermore, by ensuring time for shooting, the player can publish the captured images and videos on the Internet, which can increase public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in many cases, the images and videos are published, including which pachinko gaming machine 1 at which gaming parlor they were taken, which means that the gaming parlor is advertised by the player. In this way, by ensuring time for shooting when a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only for the player but also for the gaming parlor.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the pattern determination command has not been received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is terminated and the device waits. In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a pattern determination command after the variable display time has elapsed, a predetermined error process may be executed in response to the fact that the pattern determination command could not be received normally. If a pattern determination command has been received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern (step S250). Next, a certain time is set as a waiting time for receiving a jackpot start command (step S251). In addition, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S252), and then the variable display performance process is terminated.

Figure 10-6 shows an example of the execution of a setting suggestion effect. Figure 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. The decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and a reach is established, and a normal reach reach effect is executed. Figure 10-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which a normal reach reach effect transitions to a super reach reach effect, resulting in a reach development. The decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size on the display screen of the image display device 5, and an effect image in the super reach reach effect is displayed. Figure 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect. An effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the reach symbol that is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, an effect image announcing a message such as "Change in symbol display color!!" is displayed, suggesting a change in the symbol display color.

Figure 10-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color. Figure 10-6 (D2) shows a performance execution example HD112 in which the pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper. Figure 10-6 (D3) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver. Figure 10-6 (D4) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold. In performance execution example HD111, the pattern RE-0 does not change the display color of the reach symbol, and it remains the normal display color red. In this way, a failure performance (false performance) in which the symbol display color does not change is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low. In performance execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the reach symbol to copper, suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 2 or higher. In performance execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the reach symbol to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation of a favorable set value. In performance execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the reach symbol to gold, suggesting that the highest set value, 6, has been confirmed.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect may be an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo consecutive effect or a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the probability of a jackpot and also suggests the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be an effect that can make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state during the execution of the variable display. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then continued, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then ended, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while continuing, or a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. For example, the multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination rates depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed, a suggestion is made in the presentation mode of a pattern that is determined with a high probability, thereby diversifying the presentation and increasing interest in the game so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state may be made, but no suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made in conjunction with the execution of the jackpot start performance (fanfare performance) or the performance during the jackpot (such as the performance corresponding to the first round or second round). There may also be cases where suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 are made without making any suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

(Description of Characteristic Part 10SH)
Next, a characteristic feature 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH has an operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 has a push button 31B that the player can press to give a specific command.

The gaming machine according to feature 10SH is equipped with a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a gaze guidance effect execution means capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 10SH has a higher expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a higher reliability of winning when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means of feature section 10SH can execute a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at either of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts and timing T2 when a reach is established, timing T3 after timing T1 and timing T2 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, and timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether it is either timing T1 or timing T2, or either timing T3 or timing T4.

The visual line guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH does not execute visual line guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute visual line guidance effect at timing T1 and timing T2.

The visual guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to characteristic unit 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from a vibration effect and a gaze guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach effect of a super reach.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is provided with a display means for displaying information. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 for displaying various performance images.

The display of the visual guidance effect related to characteristic part 10SH has a lower priority than the display of specified information, and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information. For example, the visual guidance effect image has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH, and shows the layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent material, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. With this configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

The push button 31B is configured to be able to vibrate when driven by a vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is configured, for example, as an eccentric motor in which a weight with an offset center of gravity is attached to the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to provide a variety of vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L, 9R for game effects are provided at specific positions on the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided to the left of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided to the right of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L, 9R have multiple LEDs built in along the extension direction of the game effect lamps 9L, 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, turning on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the lamps to be turned on/off. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a motor control board 130. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits that drive the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic part 10SH. The performance control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display to be executed and the display result of the variable display to be executed (step 10SHS1). The fluctuation pattern and display result are identified by the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when the variable display starts and analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to a combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, lottery refers to a method of determination using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The random number value uses one of the performance random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random number update process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). A vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect that is not linked to a preview effect. In the processing of step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect by drawing lots using random number values and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121.

In the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the decision value to be compared with the random number value should be assigned to the decision result of whether or not a vibration effect is to be performed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is to be performed, so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is performed than when the vibration effect is not performed, and the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is performed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is calculated, for example, as follows: (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") / {(probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is not a "jackpot")}.

Therefore, the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2 only needs to specify the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot" and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot" so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect will be a predetermined value.

(Vibration effects and jackpot reliability)
11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a plurality of types of vibration effects, which are execution patterns SE1 to SE10, according to a combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, or timing T2 when a reach is achieved. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved. Also, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. Also, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. The performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as vibration effects at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be executed when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, which can increase interest.

In addition, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, regardless of whether it is timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, or timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors, regardless of when the vibration effect can be executed. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors.

In this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. Also, in this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot for the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result definitively indicates that a jackpot has been displayed.

This configuration allows the user to focus on the color of the light emitted by the push button 31B when it vibrates, and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the timing of execution of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts than when it is executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed. Also, even if the vibration effect is the same, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed than when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts.

This configuration can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. Also, if the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a specified reach state when no vibration effect is executed at timing T1, it can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, rather than at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed. And, when a vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, it can further heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed.

The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of normal reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the Super Reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of Super Reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of Super Reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the Super Reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of Super Reach reach performance.

With this configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, and the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed can be used as a chance-up effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the vibration effect is executed in such a manner that the push button 31B is always vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors, and the display result is definitively notified that it is a "jackpot."

This configuration can heighten the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, rather than timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. And when the vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins, it can further heighten the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In this way, in this embodiment, the sense of expectation for the vibration effect to be executed can be changed in a complex manner as the display of the decorative patterns progresses.

In addition, by setting the probability of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors to a sufficiently low probability compared to the probability of executing other vibration effects, it is possible to increase the excitement when it is definitively notified that the display result is a "jackpot."

In addition, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated to produce a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always illuminated.

This configuration allows the user to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, increasing the chances that the user will recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation then determines, based on the result of the determination in step 10SHS2, whether or not to execute a vibration presentation at either timing T3 when the normal reach presentation is being executed, or timing T4 when the super reach presentation is being executed in the current variable display (step 10SHS3).

When a vibration effect is to be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach effect (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect (step 10SHS4). An eye-guiding effect is an effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect by drawing lots using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121. In the table referenced in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio for the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect is set regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect at the same ratio regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed this time.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, a gaze guidance effect can be executed.

This configuration allows the push button 31B to be noticed before the vibration effect is executed, thereby sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

On the other hand, if a vibration effect is executed at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the gaze guidance effect is not executed.

When the display result is derived and displayed, a "miss" display result may be displayed, and then a rescue effect may be executed, resulting in the true display result being derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and the current variable display has started, if a gaze guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, this may give the wrong impression that a rescue effect was executed in the previous variable display. In contrast, in this embodiment, a gaze guidance effect is not executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, thereby preventing such a misunderstanding.

In addition, if a visual guidance effect is executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state. In contrast, in this embodiment, a visual guidance effect is not executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, so that it is possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, if a vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach reach effect (step 10SHS3; No), or after executing the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as a reach effect, and the type of effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute various effects such as a preview effect, and the type of effect, by a lottery. At this time, the probability of winning is varied depending on whether or not a preview effect is executed and the type of effect, by varying the determination ratio in the lottery depending on the current display result and the current fluctuation pattern. Also, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern will be executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance that has been decided to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special chart fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern as the initial value for the performance control process timer, and stores in the timer value storage area of RAM 122 the performance specific data that specifies the type and mode of the performance that has been decided to be executed, and the execution timing specific timer value that indicates the execution timing of the performance by comparing it with the timer value of the performance control process timer, in association with each other. If there are multiple performances that have been decided to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores the performance specific data and the execution timing specific timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start executing the variable display of the decorative pattern in the manner specified by the current variation pattern and which derives the determined final stop pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Then, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration and gaze guidance effects)
11-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and duration of vibration effects and gaze guidance effects. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols starts or timing T2 when a reach is established. Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either timing T3 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed or timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

In addition, as described above, when the CPU 120 for controlling the effects executes a vibration effect at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a gaze guidance effect before that.

In this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T3 while a normal reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T3, and starts the vibration effect when timing T3 is reached. Similarly, in this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T4 while a super reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T4, and starts the vibration effect when timing T4 is reached. The presentation period for the gaze guidance effect in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the gaze guidance effect is being executed.

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

(Example of performance)
11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams showing examples of vibration effects and gaze guidance effects. In these examples, an example of executing a vibration effect at timing T4 during the execution of a reach effect of a super reach will be described.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing multiple types of super reach reach performances. In the reach performance of a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), a background image 10SHY of a "mountain view" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the reach performance of the super reach is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed when the reach was achieved. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), a "left" reach decorative pattern 10SH5L is displayed, which is a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L when the reach was achieved, and a "right" reach decorative pattern 10SH5R is displayed, which is a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R when the reach was achieved.

In addition, a small pattern display area 10SHK, which is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, is provided in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns and decorative patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern is also called the notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing the small pattern that is the notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing the confirmed small pattern that is the display result is derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decorative pattern is performed. During the period from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when the determined decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of the small pattern continues in a constant display mode and does not disappear from the screen or be blocked by an obstruction. Therefore, the small pattern display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always see the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 10SHK. The small pattern variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK is also called a constant small pattern or a small pattern for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a performance image showing a plurality of types of small patterns that are identifiable each other may be variably displayed as a notification information image in a display mode that is partially or entirely common to each of the plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern showing a number similar to the portion showing a number in the decorative pattern. The small pattern may be displayed only when the decorative pattern is not displayed. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbols, a variable display of a small symbol may be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A).

In addition, a fourth pattern may be provided following the special and decorative patterns, and the fourth pattern may be variable displayed in sync with the variable display of the special and decorative patterns. The variable display of the fourth pattern may be realized, for example, by continuing display control that repeatedly displays and hides a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth pattern display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth pattern, the display result in the variable display of the small patterns may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize.

The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, to the right side of the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the variable display of the special symbol is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. In response to this, by performing a variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to display whether the variable display is in progress or whether the display result has been derived in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In this example, a pending display area 10SHH is displayed to display a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA is displayed to display an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. Note that when a reach performance of a super reach is being executed, the pending display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may be hidden.

In addition, a reserved number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similar to the reserved number display area 10SHH, the reserved number of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special game is displayed in a specific manner. The display form is a form in which it is displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the gaze guidance presentation 4 seconds before timing T4 during the execution of the reach presentation of the super reach. As a gaze guidance presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a presentation that uses a visual presentation effect, for example, to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

In this example, the performance control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC that resembles a character holding a hammer, and a button image 10SHB that resembles a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character performs the action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 11-6 (B) to (D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside, in accordance with the character's action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 11-6 (B) to (D).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in Figures 11-7 (E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside, in time with the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in Figures 11-7 (E) and (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 changes the appearance of the various images so that the hammer swung down by the character hits the button image 10SHB and multiple "star" effect images 10SHS that resemble stars scatter from the button image 10SHB. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 starts a vibration performance, vibrating the push button 31B and lighting up the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Then, one second after timing T4, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the gaze guidance presentation, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration presentation has elapsed, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the vibration presentation, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and turns off the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Here, the push button 31B is located away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the play area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the state of the push button 31B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the push button 31B is vibrating or lit up. In response to this, by executing a gaze guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before it vibrates, and the vibration of the push button 31B can be appropriately recognized, thereby sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

The priority of the display of the visual guidance effects is set lower than that of the constant small symbols and the reserved number display. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the visual guidance effects in a layer behind the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the reserved number display.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the constant small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the constant small pattern.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the reserved number display shown in the reserved number display area 10SHHS, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the reserved number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the eye guidance effects is set higher than the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative patterns. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the eye guidance effects in a layer that is closer to the front than the layers that display the background image and decorative patterns.

In this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of a "mountain scenery," and it can be said that the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB, which are displays for guiding the viewer's gaze, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of a "mountain scenery."

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the character image 10SHC, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the reserved display displayed in the reserved display area 10SHH, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the reserved display.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the active display.

With this configuration, when the visual guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the visual guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring optimal visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), when the visual guidance effect is being executed, the display of the visual guidance effect and the constant small pattern and the number of reserved items, which have a higher priority than the display of the visual guidance effect, are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

With this configuration, when the gaze guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display can be more optimally ensured at all times, while the visibility of the gaze guidance effect can be made more noticeable.

(Modification of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the processing of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 11-3, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect may be set according to which type of vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect at different ratios according to whether the current vibration effect is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Here, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red is executed. Also, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the gaze-guiding effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. With this configuration, the execution of the gaze-guiding effect can increase the expectation of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance may be capable of executing a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance. In this case, as a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance, multiple types of vibration performance may be executed according to a combination of the linked advance notice performance, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a feature advance notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed according to the operating state of the movable body 32. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a vibration performance linked with a highly reliable feature advance notice performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked feature advance notice performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be a performance that increases the chances of winning in the feature advance notice performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may also be capable of executing a vibration performance linked to other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration performance vibrates the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the preview performance, and causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 may be one in which the jackpot game state is started when the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or winning hole, after the determined decorative pattern that is the jackpot combination is derived. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the player of the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may also execute a vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and notifies the player that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B may be vibrated for three seconds and illuminated in rainbow colors to definitively announce that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is the highest number of rounds among the multiple options. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect linked to the round lottery effect.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing an error notification process. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, an error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5, or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The performance control CPU 120 may display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 while executing a gaze guidance performance. In that case, the display of the gaze guidance performance may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. With this configuration, even if a gaze guidance performance is executed when the error notification image is displayed, the visibility of the error notification image can be preferably ensured.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the gaze guidance effect is performed and when the gaze guidance effect is not performed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is performed than when the gaze guidance effect is not performed, it is possible to increase the interest when the gaze guidance effect is performed and the vibration effect is performed. Also, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is not performed than when the gaze guidance effect is performed, it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating even if the gaze guidance effect is not performed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be different before the reference timing and after the reference timing, with a certain timing as the reference. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before the timing T2 when the reach is established, and 3 seconds at the timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2, or at the timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2. In this way, the vibration time after the reference timing is longer than the vibration time before the reference timing. With this configuration, the performance effect when the vibration performance is executed after the reference timing can be improved.

The reliability of the vibration effect that will result in a big win may differ depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B. For example, the push button 31B may be vibrated with a first strength and a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and when the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength, the reliability of the vibration effect that will result in a big win may be higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength. With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the strength of the vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win may be the same for a first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and a second type of pachinko gaming machine 1 that is different from the first type. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win executed in the first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second type of pachinko gaming machine 1, respectively, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration effect may be executed as a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunities to execute the vibration effect.

In addition, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is the first mode and when it is the second mode. For example, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time and when it is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect.

Alternatively, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be set to be only executable at any one of multiple timings at which a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress. For example, the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be executed only at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which a vibration effect as a look-ahead preview can be executed, it is possible to conveniently recognize that a vibration effect has been executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress.

When a vibration performance is executed as a pre-reading notice performance at a timing when a vibration performance can be executed as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed, the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance. For example, when a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continues to vibrate for a predetermined time, and the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. With this configuration, when a vibration effect can be executed as a pre-reading preview effect at a timing when a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, it is possible to easily recognize which vibration effect has been executed.

When the execution pattern of the vibration effect and the jackpot reliability are common between a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type, the jackpot reliability may be common even if the mode of the vibration effect executed at the specific timing in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the mode of the vibration effect executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1. For example, even if the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed at the timing T2 when a reach is established in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is 100%. With this configuration, even if the type of pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B during the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect being executed at that time, for example, when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed. For example, when an announcement effect is executed to announce that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when the reach is achieved, the vibration effect is set to vibrate the push button 31B during the period when the image of the announcement effect is being displayed. With this configuration, even when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed for vibration effects of the same execution pattern. With this configuration, for example, when a vibration effect is executed as an effect to increase the chances of another effect, it is possible to flexibly adjust the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect while preventing players from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, after the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect can execute a provocative effect that encourages the development of a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability than the reach state after temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination. After the provocative effect is executed, there are cases where the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and cases where the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss". When the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative success effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. On the other hand, when the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss", the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative failure effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. When executing such a provocation effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing when the provocation success effect is executed. This configuration can increase the interest when the provocation success effect is executed.

The vibration duration of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be adjusted to match the image of the teasing success effect. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the interest when the teasing success effect is executed.

The illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be the same as the illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. With this configuration, when the teasing success effect is executed, even if it develops into a reach state with a high jackpot reliability, the display result may be "miss," but it is possible to prevent the jackpot reliability from being excessively increased.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot," the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a vibration effect immediately before the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, is stopped. This configuration not only increases the interest in the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped, but also heightens the sense of anticipation for the vibration effect itself, and can increase interest when the vibration effect is executed at other times as well.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect can be "rainbow-colored" even when a "jackpot" occurs for a jackpot type other than the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple types of jackpot types with different advantages for the player. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect becomes "rainbow-colored," it is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that a "jackpot" occurs for the jackpot type with the highest advantage.

If there are only two types of jackpots that provide players with different degrees of advantage, it is possible to avoid setting an execution pattern in which the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a jackpot of a type that provides a low degree of advantage to the player from occurring even if the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects, and thus prevents the player's expectations for the vibration effects from being diminished.

The presentation control CPU 120 may use an auditory presentation effect to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B as a visual guidance presentation. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may output a specific sound effect when a vibration presentation is being executed, and output the specific sound effect as a visual guidance presentation so that the volume gradually changes from a low volume to a high volume. With this configuration, a player who has difficulty recognizing visual guidance presentations that use visual presentation effects can be directed to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

When the configuration is such that the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the same execution pattern may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. For example, even when the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern may be higher than when the setting value is "1". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is "jackpot", the expectation of the highly advantageous setting value can be increased.

In the case where the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. With this configuration, the setting value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is any of "1" to "3" and when the setting value is any of "4" to "6". With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is a high setting that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player. Also, for example, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is an odd number and when the setting value is an even number. With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is an even number that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player.

Even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it may be possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. With this configuration, even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to draw attention not only to the fact that the vibration effect is being executed, but also to the state when the vibration effect is executed.

If it is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at both the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing T2 when the reach is established. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is not executed at either the timing T1 or the timing T2, the combination of the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T1 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T2 may be a specific combination, so that the display result is definitively notified as "jackpot". With this configuration, even if the vibration effect that vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to glow in rainbow colors is not executed when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when the reach is achieved, and to further increase attention to the vibration effect at the timing T2.

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect. In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T3 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T4 may be a specific combination, so that the display result is definitively notified as "jackpot". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed, not only can the expectation of the vibration effect being executed at timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect be increased, but the attention to the vibration effect at timing T4 can be further increased.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is not definitely a "jackpot" is monotonous, whereas in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot", the push button 31B vibrates in accordance with a predetermined rhythm. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When a vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when a normal reach is being performed or at timing T4 when a super reach is being performed, a visual guidance effect may be executed without fail. With this configuration, the sense of expectation that the display result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of a reach effect can be appropriately increased by appropriately recognizing the vibration of the operating means.

When a vibration effect is executed at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started or the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at either the timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed or the timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the execution pattern of the vibration effect executable at the timing T3 or the timing T4 may be restricted so that the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 are not lower than the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2, in other words, so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 is not lower than the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. For example, when the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE2 is executed at the timing T1, the execution of the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE5 is restricted at the timing T3, and the execution of the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE8 is restricted at the timing T4. With this configuration, when multiple vibration effects are performed in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the jackpot from decreasing.

When it is possible to execute a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the preview performance and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the preview performance may be different. For example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a reel preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the sound effect when the reel operates. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is illuminated in a color different from the illumination color of the push button 31B in a vibration effect not linked to a preview performance. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed, it is easy to recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to a preview performance or not.

It may also be possible to execute a present box effect. In this case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the open present box, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), and a gaze-guiding effect may be executed. With this configuration, the execution of the present box effect can increase the sense of anticipation for the gaze-guiding effect and the vibration effect.

When an operation performance for operating the push button 31B can be executed, the push button 31B may be lit in this operation performance during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In this case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the lighting manner of the push button 31B in the vibration performance. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for vibration performance in which the push button 31B is continuously illuminated in red for 3 seconds during which the push button 31B is vibrated. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is lit in the operation performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for button operation suggestion in which the push button 31B is switched between red illumination (illumination) and non-illumination (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In addition, during a valid lever operation period during which the operation of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A may be lit up to notify that the operation of the operating lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is lit up in a lever operation suggestion mode during the valid lever operation period. The lighting mode for the lever operation suggestion may be the same as the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion, or may be a different lighting mode from the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion.

For example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like may be operated by the player to change settings related to the effects, such as the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the setting of the type of music or background to be output, the brightness setting of the image display device 5, the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from a menu screen, or a different operation may be performed corresponding to the item to be changed by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. In addition, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lit to notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation effect. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 10SH)
In relation to characteristic part 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, see JP 2019-051075 A).

Generally, players play games while looking at the display means on which the variable display and various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, there is a possibility that the player will not be aware that the operating means is vibrating even when a vibration effect is executed. In such a case, the interest provided by the vibration effect cannot be sufficiently heightened.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effects are executed and to sufficiently heighten interest in the vibration effects, the gaming machine of means 1 relating to characteristic section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, etc.), and includes operation means that can be operated by the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a push button 31B that the player can press to perform a predetermined instruction operation, etc.), and vibration effect execution means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates, etc.), and is configured to attract the player's attention. and a visual line guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides a line to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the push button 31B, etc.), and the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 1 20 is capable of executing a vibration effect at any one of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when a reach is established, and any one of timing T3 during which a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, and timing T4 during which a reach effect of a super reach is being executed), and is capable of executing the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or timing T3 and The vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether the timing is T1 or T4), and the visual guidance effect execution means does not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute a visual guidance effect at timings T1 and T2), and can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timings T3 and T4).

This configuration allows the player to focus on the operating means before the vibration effect is executed, and can adequately increase interest in the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 relating to feature 10SH may be configured such that in the gaming machine of means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed, etc.).

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 relating to characteristic part 10SH may be equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the gaze guidance effect in the gaming machine of means 1 or 2 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a reach effect of a super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, etc.).

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be performed while a specific effect is being performed, which can increase interest.

The gaming machine of feature 10SH according to means 4 may be equipped with a display means for displaying information in any of the gaming machines according to means 1 to 3 (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be equipped with an image display device 5 for displaying various presentation images, etc.), and the display of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the display of specified information and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information (e.g., the presentation image of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the constant small symbols, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, decorative symbols, etc.).

With this configuration, when the visual guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the visual guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring the visibility of the specified information.

The gaming machine of feature 5 relating to feature 10SH is a gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 4, in which the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect of the first mode and the vibration effect of the second mode which suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than in the first mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white is executed). (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a winning combination is executed), and when the visual guidance effect is executed, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed than the first vibration effect (for example, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a visual guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a winning combination is executed).

With this configuration, the gaze guidance effect can be executed, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation for the execution of the second type of vibration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature of the characteristic feature 10SH may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate. The combined feature features or individual feature features that are not combined may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 12-1 shows a configuration example of the performance device related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance, which serves as a movable performance device, is provided at the lower end front, which is the lower edge part on the front side overlapping with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to the operation motor via, for example, a link mechanism. The movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be one whose position can be changed by power from, for example, an operation solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 has a frame and a window. The frame of the movable body 32 is made of a decorative material and has a configuration that can be covered so that the player cannot see the display screen of the image display device 5. The window of the movable body 32 is made of transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a see-through configuration that allows the player to see the display screen of the image display device 5.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, multiple LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and multiple LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the game area in the game machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position to the left of the game area in the game machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position to the right of the game area in the game machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and multiple LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of multiple LEDs built into the operating stick (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of multiple LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be formed in part or in whole from a translucent material. As a result, when the lever lamp 9B1 is turned on, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated. Also, when the button lamp 9B2 is turned on, the push button 31B can be illuminated.

For example, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or in a position close to the push button 31B, or may be built into the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or provided at the base position of the operation lever. Multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

In the pachinko game machine 1, an operation section performance including a light-emitting performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestive performance that indicates that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration manner according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Note that in the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, one of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. For example, only the push button 31B may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting only the button lamp 9B2.

Figure 12-2 (A) shows an example of the setting of the operation unit performance pattern used to execute the operation unit performance. In this setting example, operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance as a plurality of operation unit performance patterns. The light emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and use are set corresponding to each operation unit performance pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the light emission state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the vibration state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and is controlled to the jackpot game state when the operation unit performance according to the operation unit performance pattern is executed. The uses corresponding to the operation unit performance patterns indicate the timing at which the operation unit performance is executed for each operation unit performance pattern.

The operation unit performance can be executed at multiple times in accordance with the progress of the variable display, such as when the pre-change starts, when the target change starts, when a reach is established, when the reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification tease is given. The pre-change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. The target change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. When a reach is established, it is a timing corresponding to the case where the variable display becomes a reach state. When a reach develops, it is a timing corresponding to the case where a development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of a super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies the execution of the reach performance of a super reach (reach development) after the reach performance of a normal reach is executed. When a hit/miss notification tease is given, it is a timing corresponding to the teasing performance before the hit/miss notification performance that notifies the execution of whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" while the reach performance of a super reach is being executed.

In the example setting shown in FIG. 12-2(A), multiple operation unit performance patterns that can be used to execute operation unit performances according to multiple timings are prepared in advance. Also, it is set up so that different operation unit performance patterns can be used according to multiple timings at which the operation unit performances can be executed.

When the reach performance of the super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach performance of the normal reach is executed and the reach performance of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether the reach performance of the super reach is executed and the fixed decoration pattern of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether the game state is controlled to the jackpot. For the reach performance of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach performances including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances with different performance modes. Each reach performance may include performances with a common performance mode. The determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" may be set so that the reliability of the jackpot is according to each reach performance. It is only necessary to set the presence or absence of the reach performance, the presence or absence of the reach performance of the super reach, the performance mode in the reach performance, etc. according to the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random number value for determining the variation pattern.

Regardless of the specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as reach effects, the execution of the operation unit effects can be determined at a predetermined rate according to whether the variable display result is a "jackpot". Such operation unit effects that can be executed regardless of specific effects are also called standalone operation unit effects. In contrast, effects that cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light or vibrate in association with specific effects may be executed. Effects that cause light emission or vibration in association with such specific effects are also called specific linked effects.

Figure 12-2 (B) shows a setting example when a specific interlocking performance is executed. In this setting example, the light emission color and vibration pattern are set when a specific interlocking performance is executed in conjunction with multiple specific performances, such as the movable body operation, image display, music playback, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The light emission color in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is common to the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking performance is included in the special vibration performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance. The illumination of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during a specific linked performance is included in the specific illumination performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance.

The reach effect of SP Reach A may have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type selection CH1 may be a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the smallest (e.g., 4 rounds). The jackpot type selection CH2 may be a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is the second jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the largest (e.g., 16 rounds). Note that the jackpot type selection CH1 and CH2 may be selection effects related to the type of jackpot depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot game state, or the end condition, or may be selection effects related to the presence or absence or amount of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state, and the increase in the number of rounds. As the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, when the jackpot game state can be controlled to a certain probability state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that entered the V entry port of the V entry attacker, a lottery performance may be executed for a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the end conditions of the certain probability control. When the small win game state can be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a V entry due to a game ball entering the V entry attacker, a lottery performance may be executed for a small win game state or a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the number of rounds of the jackpot game state controlled after the occurrence of a V entry.

Until the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released is started, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and then, during the period from the start of the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released to the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. Then, when a V winning occurs, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and a performance including the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is more difficult to detect than the strong vibration monitoring state. In a period in which there is a high risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state. In contrast, in a period in which there is a low risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, it is sufficient that the performance control CPU 120 can execute control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality, such as displaying an alarm image, outputting an alarm sound, turning on an alarm lamp, outputting an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko game machine 1 may be stopped from playing under the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100. This allows appropriate vibration monitoring and prevents a decrease in interest in the game from being caused by an inappropriate abnormality judgment that results in a vibration error being notified or a game being stopped.

Figure 12-3 shows the vibration pattern settings. A number of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration modes of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Figure 12-3 (A) shows the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects. Figure 12-3 (B) shows the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration effects included in the specific linked effects.

Vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on and off periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed when the pre-fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the light color of the light effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV02, the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance by operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed when the pre-change starts. In addition, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC11 that can be executed when the target change starts. On the other hand, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-change start or the target change start. In the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC02, the light color in the light-emitting performance that lights up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration performance is red. In the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC03, the light color in the light-emitting performance that lights up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration performance is rainbow. In the operation unit presentation using operation unit presentation pattern AKC11, the color of the light emitted by the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is white in response to the vibration presentation.

In vibration pattern AKV03, the vibration mode has an on period that continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effects by operation unit effects patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed when the target fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the operation unit effects by vibration pattern AKV03 are not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the target fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is red. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is rainbow.

In vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKR1 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21, the light color in the light-emitting effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKR2 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22, the light color in the light-emitting effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes orange.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when a reach is reached, an effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is reached. For example, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is reached. Also, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is reached. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is reached and the operation unit effect executed when the pre-change starts or the target change starts. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that an increase in the control burden and control data of the effect can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV21, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the performance AKS1 when a reach develops. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the light color in the light-emitting performance that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration performance becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKS2 when a reach develops. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32, the light color in the light effect that illuminates the stick controller 31A and push button 31B in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach develops, an effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time of the reach development. For example, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed when the reach develops. Also, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach develops. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach develops and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-change or the start of the target change. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that the control burden of the effect and the increase in control data can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period may continue until the player's action on the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inviting the winner or loser. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the win/lose notification effect. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, the light color of the light-emitting effect that causes the stick controller 31A and push button 31B to light up in conjunction with the vibration effect is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect is performed by the vibration pattern AKV31, whether or not to provide an effective detection period may be varied depending on the type of effect performed with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. When the effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. In addition, when the effective detection period is not provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have a light-emitting mode for vibration effect that continuously emits gold light over the period in which the operation lever and push button 31B are vibrated. On the other hand, when the effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between red light emission (on) different from gold and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. By executing a light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting mode is switched between light-emitting and non-light-emitting every 150 milliseconds, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation of the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is valid while executing the vibration effect. Alternatively, the priority of the light-emitting control may be made different by using a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set. For example, in the first lamp layer, lamp control data is set as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation, in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between red light-emitting (on) and non-light-emitting (off) every 150 milliseconds. In the second lamp layer, lamp control data is set as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a special operation, in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is continuously lighted in gold for an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. Then, the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is executed with priority over the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. This allows the light emission pattern for suggesting a special operation to be prioritized over the light emission pattern for suggesting a normal operation as the light emission pattern for the light emission effect.

The multiple reach effects that become super reaches may include a strong SP reach with a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of a strong SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed after a motion detection effect is executed by detecting the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a strong SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode continues for an on period until the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. In the reach effect of a weak SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed without executing a motion detection effect. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a weak SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed 1500 milliseconds or more before the hit/miss notification effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the valid detection period. Alternatively, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 150 milliseconds and an off period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B is not vibrated during the valid detection period. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds. The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a strong SP reach is executed and the operation performance when the reach performance of a weak SP reach is executed. For example, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a strong SP reach is executed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the valid detection period. In contrast, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a weak SP reach is executed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds to emit gold light.

Vibration pattern AKV41 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV42 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the screen display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV43 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV44 provides a vibration pattern in which the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

Vibration caused by vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes blue along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration caused by vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes gold along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration caused by vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the special linked performance that is executed in conjunction with the music playback in the SP Reach A reach performance, the light color in the special light-emitting performance changes from blue to red to gold in response to the vibration of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

The vibrations caused by vibration pattern AKV44 may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, or may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, CH2. In specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes white as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH2, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

Figure 12-4 shows an example of an effect that is executed by vibrating and illuminating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, multiple effect execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Note that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B only need to emit light with a normal light emission brightness set to a low light emission color so that the light emission color is white in the normal light emission state. Alternatively, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-illumination so that they do not emit light in the normal light emission state.

In the performance execution example AKA01, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white. When an operation unit performance is executed using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the light color becomes white. The operation unit performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a pre-variation. The operation unit performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a target variation. Both operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performances using the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22. The light color also becomes white when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific performance.

In the example of effect execution, AKA02, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red. When an operation unit effect is executed using either operation unit effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the light color becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. Operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. Both operation unit effects using operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 have a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect using operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03. When playing music for SP Reach A as a specific effect, a performance period in which the light color becomes red is also included.

In the example of effect execution, AKA03, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors. When an operation unit effect is executed using either the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 or AKC13, the light-emitting color becomes rainbow. The operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. The operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. The operation unit effects using the operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 both have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV03. The light-emitting color also becomes rainbow when a specific effect such as a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

In the performance execution example AKA04, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in pink. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 is executed, the light color becomes pink. Operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV11.

In the performance execution example AKA05, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in orange. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 is executed, the light color becomes orange. Operation unit performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV12.

In performance execution example AKV06, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated blue. When an operation section performance is executed, the light color does not turn blue. When the movable body operation of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light color turns blue. Also, when music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light color turns blue is included.

In the performance execution example AKV07, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in gold. When an operation section performance is executed by operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emission color becomes gold. Operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing an operation section performance during a hit/miss notification. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV31. When an image display of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light emission color becomes gold. Also, when a music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light emission color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the light emission colors of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance. In addition to the light emission color, any light emission mode, such as the light emission time, the number of times light is emitted (the number of times it flashes), the light emission cycle (the flashing cycle), and the light emission brightness, may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance.

When the operation section performance is executed at the start of the advance variation, it can be executed as a pre-reading notice performance or a continuous notice performance. The pre-reading notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" continuously over multiple variable displays executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance can be executed using a continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number. The reserved memory number here may be the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning. As the continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number, multiple continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning, and is subtracted by one each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

Figure 12-5 shows an example of the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance. The continuous performance pattern can be determined, for example, by using a random number value for determining the continuous performance pattern, referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and determining the determination result to which a determination value matching the random number value is assigned according to the result of the winning determination.

Figure 12-5 (A) shows the continuous performance patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC11 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-5 (B) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "3". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-5 (C) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "4". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-6 is a flow chart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S161 of Figure 9 as a pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in Figure 12-6, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables the execution of a pre-reading notice performance that becomes a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is judged whether or not the performance control command transmitted at the time of the start winning (starting port winning designation command, pending memory number notification command, winning time judgment result command) has been received. If no command is received, it is judged that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. If a command is received, the notification content according to the received command is identified, and for example, the winning time judgment result is identified as the notification content according to the winning time judgment result command.

The winning judgment result may be a result of judging whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the variation pattern is determined to be a specific variation pattern by the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of the special pattern process process using the game random number extracted at the start winning. The winning judgment result may be, for example, any of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmation on miss, reach confirmation on miss, and general on miss. The winning judgment result of a jackpot is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot judgment range and is controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result of a super reach confirmation on miss is a judgment result included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range on miss, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result for a reach confirmation on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range on a miss. The winning judgment result for a general win on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range on a miss nor within the reach confirmation range.

The pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, the pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the current winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, and all previous winning judgment results corresponding to the reserved memory have been general on a miss. Note that if the pre-reading prediction performance that will result in a consecutive prediction performance is already set to start, the pre-reading prediction condition may be restricted from being established.

If the pre-reading prediction condition is not met (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading prediction setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading prediction condition is met (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction (step AKS102). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction may be extracted, and depending on the result of the winning judgment, a pre-reading prediction execution decision table stored in advance in ROM121 may be referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction, thereby determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance. In step AKS102, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance, either "no execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is not executed, or "execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is executed. It is determined whether or not the result of the decision at this time has been determined to be "execution" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not to be executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Next, the consecutive performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the consecutive performance pattern may be extracted, and the consecutive performance pattern may be determined to be one of a number of patterns by referring to a consecutive performance pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to the result of the winning judgment.

After the continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105, a pre-reading preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-reading preview flag provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control flag setting section) may be set to the ON state.

In such a pre-reading notice setting process, if the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, the pre-reading notice condition in step AKS101 can be established, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice in step AKS102 and the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105. If the winning judgment result is a jackpot, step AKS102 may determine "execution yes" to execute the pre-reading notice performance at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, in step AKS105, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. In this way, it is sufficient that the continuous notice performance that becomes the pre-reading notice performance can be executed based on the winning judgment result that becomes the pre-reading judgment result.

Figure 12-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S171 of Figure 9 as a variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 12-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern, etc., which will be the final decorative pattern as the variable display result of the decorative pattern (step AKS201). The performance control CPU 120 may determine the final stop pattern based on the variable display content, such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The variable pattern designation command and the display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by setting the transmission of the command at the start of the special pattern's variation when the variable pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special pattern process process. The variable pattern designation command is a performance control command that designates the variable pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a performance control command that designates the variable display result determined using a random number value for determining the special pattern display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display results may be "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probability change (jackpot)", and "probability change (jackpot)".

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the reach miss combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a probability change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns with the same even numbered patterns is determined as the final stop pattern. Also, when the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," it is sufficient to be able to determine a combination of fixed decorative patterns with the same odd numbered patterns as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a non-reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When determining a combination of fixed decorative patterns, for example, numerical data that will be a random number value for pattern determination is extracted, and the stopping pattern of the decorative patterns can be determined by referring to a pattern determination table that is stored in advance in ROM121 according to the variable display content.

After the final stop pattern and the like are determined, the operation section presentation is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. For example, if the pre-reading preview flag is on, it may be determined that a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. If a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operation section presentation pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the consecutive presentation pattern. The consecutive presentation pattern may be the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading preview setting process, and may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the pre-reading preview flag may be cleared to the off state.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not being performed, the presence or absence of the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit performance pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation unit performance may be extracted, and depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot", the presence or absence of the operation unit performance, i.e., whether or not to execute the operation unit performance, and the operation unit performance pattern to be used when executing the operation unit performance may be determined by referring to an operation unit performance determination table previously stored in RAM121. The operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display may be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not being performed, and may not be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is being performed. Therefore, a limit is set for the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit performance included in the pre-reading preview performance is executed.

In step AKS202, when a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance is executed in conjunction with a specific performance based on a fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted. For example, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at any timing. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that all operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Alternatively, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit performance at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at the timing corresponding to the development of the reach or the announcement of the hit or miss. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that some operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. In addition, within the range of the variable display in which a specific effect is executed, a limit may be set so that some or all of the operation unit effects are difficult to execute while the variable display is being executed. In this way, the effect control CPU 120, which determines the operation unit effects in step AKS202, can limit the execution of the operation unit effects, including the vibration effect, when a special vibration effect is executed.

When the operation unit performance is determined by step AKS202, if a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the result of the judgment at the time of winning, the determination ratio of the operation unit performance may be set so that some or all of the operation unit performance is more likely to be executed during the execution of the variable display than when the special performance is not executed.

After the operation section performance is determined, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of the multiple patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (variable display performance control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. The performance control CPU 120 may also select one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (operation section performance control patterns) in response to the operation section performance determined in step AKS202, and set it as the usage pattern. In addition, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the performance control timer setting section) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, the decorative pattern or the like is started to vary on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (variable display performance control pattern) determined in step AKS203 can be transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby starting the variation of the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After the variable start setting has been made, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display and the like, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during the variable display (step AKS207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 12-8 shows an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. The performance control pattern includes a variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (A) and an operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (B). The variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (A) includes control data used to control the execution of various performances from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. The operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation unit performance.

The variable display performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, and end code. The performance control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the performance control process timer value, which is the stored value of the performance control process timer, and a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (performance time) of each performance operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, data indicating the timing of switching the performance control, etc., may be set in response to a specified control content or processing content, such as, for example, a specified performance control command being received from the main board 11, or a specified process being executed as a process for controlling a performance operation in the performance control CPU 120.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variable mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects etc. linked to the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating the light emission drive mode of light-emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of light-emitting bodies during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes data indicating the performance operation mode corresponding to the detection of the player's action, such as the effective detection period during which the player's action, such as tilting the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, pointing to the trigger button, or pressing the push button 31B, is effectively detected, and data specifying the control content of the performance operation when each action is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating, for example, the on period and drive mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all performance control patterns, and there may be performance control patterns that include some of the control data depending on the content of the performance action by each performance control pattern. Furthermore, for multiple types of process data included in a performance control pattern, the type of control data that makes up each process data may differ depending on the content of the performance action executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data that includes all of the display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and there may be process data that includes some of these. Furthermore, various other control data may be included, such as movable body control data that indicates the operating state of the movable body 32.

In the variable display performance processing in step S172 of the performance control process processing, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, a determination is made as to whether it matches any of the performance control process timer judgment values, and if it does match, control of the performance operation is performed according to the various corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 proceeds with the control of the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, light-emitting elements such as game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) according to the contents of process data #1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the performance control pattern. In addition, in each process data #1 to #n, the display control data #1 to #n, audio control data #1 to #n, lamp control data #1 to #n, operation detection control data #1 to #n, and vibration control data #1 to #n correspond to the performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n, and constitute the performance control execution data #1 to #n that indicate the control content of the performance operation in the performance device and specify the execution of performance control.

The operation unit performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, and vibration control data. The lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light-emitting body in the operation unit performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In other words, the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data that indicates the on period and drive mode of the vibration generating device in the operation unit performance, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131. In other words, the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance.

Figure 12-9 shows an example of the timing settings for the operation section performance in vibration performance execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings at which the operation section performance can be executed at the start of pre-change, corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the pre-change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, the operation section performance can be executed at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-change, depending on the remaining number of times. For example, if the remaining number of times is "3", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT01, if the remaining number of times is "2", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT02, and if the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 12-9 corresponds to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target change, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance can be executed at the start of the target change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the advance change, the operation unit performance can be executed using the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times, and then at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance can be executed using the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times being "0". Also, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance may be executed. Specifically, if one of the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit performance can be executed using the determined operation unit performance pattern at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change.

The timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as timing AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, may be such that the operation unit performance can be executed at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the operation unit performance can be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in Figure 12-9 are timings at which the operation unit presentation when a reach is established, when a reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification is triggered can be executed as operation unit presentations corresponding to the current variable display. For example, depending on the operation unit presentation pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, there are cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach develops, and cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT14 when a hit/miss notification is triggered. Specifically, if either operation unit presentation pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Also, if step AKS202 determines that either operation unit presentation pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT13, which is the time when the reach develops. Alternatively, if step ASK202 determines that operation unit presentation pattern AKC41 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is the time when the win/loss notification is triggered.

Figure 12-10 shows an example of control of the operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 12-10 (A) becomes white, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in Figure 12-10 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds, as shown in Figure 12-10 (B). The light emission performance associated with this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance, as shown in Figure 12-10 (A). During the off period of the vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In the light emission effect, the light color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration effect, and the white light emission luminance may change periodically, for example, by alternating between a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low white light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during the on-period of 300 milliseconds.

Figure 12-11 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 12-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 12-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 12-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 12-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds as shown in Figure 12-11 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC02, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors by transitioning between red, red-purple, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange light colors according to the elapsed time and the light emission position. The light emission positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be specified as multiple sections, such as the top and bottom of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and it is sufficient that the light emission time, light emission color, and light emission brightness may be partially or entirely set according to each section.

Figure 12-12 shows an example of control of the operation part performance by the operation part performance pattern AKC11. The operation part performance by the operation part performance pattern AKC11 includes a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color shown in Figure 12-12 (A) becomes white, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in Figure 12-12 (B), and can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on-period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in Figure 12-12 (B). In the light-emitting performance associated with this vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration performance, as shown in Figure 12-12 (A). In the light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration performance, the white light-emitting brightness may change periodically, for example, by alternating between a first brightness with a high white light-emitting brightness and a second brightness with a low light-emitting brightness every 30 milliseconds during the on-period of 1500 milliseconds.

Figure 12-13 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC12 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 12-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 12-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC13 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 12-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 12-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds as shown in Figure 12-13 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC12, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may periodically change the light emission brightness of red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with a high light emission brightness of red light and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 has a light emission mode that changes the light emission brightness in a shorter period than the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. In this way, the light emission performance may be performed in a different light emission period as well as a different light emission color, so that the reliability of a jackpot can be suggested. During the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternating between red light emission and non-emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light-emitting effect, the light emission cycle may be common, but the light emission color may be different to indicate the reliability of a jackpot. In this way, for example, when the light-emitting colors in the light-emitting effects are different, the light-emitting cycle may be common to reduce the control burden of the light-emitting effects.

Figure 12-14 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed in response to the performance AKR1 shown in Figure 12-14 (A) which is the performance when the reach is established at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 12-14 (B) becomes pink, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in Figure 12-14 (C). The performance AKR1 which is the performance when the reach is established may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a performance that displays a background image according to the reach establishment, or may be any other performance associated with the establishment of the reach. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds) as shown in Figure 12-14 (C). As shown in FIG. 12-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is achieved by the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 lighting up in pink in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the OFF period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off.

Figure 12-15 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22. The operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22 can be executed in response to presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, shown in Figure 12-15 (A), at the timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and includes a light emission presentation in which the light color shown in Figure 12-15 (B) becomes orange, and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV12 shown in Figure 12-15 (C). Presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, may be, for example, a presentation that displays a presentation image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a presentation that displays a background image according to the establishment of a reach, or may be any other presentation associated with the establishment of a reach. Presentation AKR1 and presentation AKR2, which are the presentations when a reach is established, may have different presentation forms. As shown in FIG. 12-15(C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is a vibration mode including an on period of the first vibration on time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) alternately repeated twice, followed by an on period of the second vibration on time (e.g., 250 milliseconds) and an on period of the third vibration on time (e.g., 500 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-15(B), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In addition, when the on period of the vibration effect is a different vibration on time, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange continuously. In contrast, during the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently. During the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 alternate between emitting orange light and not emitting light every 20 milliseconds, thereby intermittently emitting orange light.

The operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, corresponding to the performances AKS1 and AKS2 when the reach develops, and include a light emission performance in which the light color becomes white, and a vibration performance by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS1. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC32, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS2. In both cases of operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the light emission performance associated with these vibration performances is that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the win/lose prompting performance at the timing AKT14 when the win/lose notification is prompted, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds or more. The light emission performance accompanying this vibration performance causes the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 to light up in gold in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

As shown in FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect includes the case where the light emission color becomes white and the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03, which is different from vibration pattern AKV02, is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs when the light emission color becomes white and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that when the light emission color becomes red and when the light emission color becomes rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both cases. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32. In this way, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops have a common light-emitting color of white, and the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes are common, while the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the interest in the game. In addition, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 or AKC13. As in this case, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops may have different light-emitting modes and different vibration modes. As in the case where the light-emitting color becomes white, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance that is common to the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. Also, as in the case where the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts may include a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance that is different from the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. The operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not have to include an illumination pattern of the illumination effect that is different from the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered include operation unit effects by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes gold in association with the vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV31. This operation unit effect has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered have a common jackpot reliability of 100%, and there are cases in which the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different. In addition, the light emission color and vibration pattern of the vibration effect are different between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the reliability of the big hit is the same, but the vibration pattern of the vibration effect or the light emission pattern of the light emission effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be increased.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white, red, or rainbow in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is established, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting patterns of the light-emitting patterns and the vibration patterns of the vibration effects differ between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is established. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section performance differs, the light emission mode of the light emission performance differs, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance differs, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, thereby increasing the interest in playing the game.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white in association with vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting state of the light-emitting state differs between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect differs. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light emission state of the light emission performance or the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a white light emission color. Also, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a pink or orange light emission color. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, even if the light emission state of the light emission performance is the same, the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT01 to AKT03 when the preliminary fluctuation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, the jackpot reliability is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing when the vibration performance is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect. Note that the vibration mode of the vibration effect can be varied by varying the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity caused by driving the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong and weak vibrations in vibration intensity, or any other vibration pattern that vibrates an operating member such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

The multiple specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the moving body operation, image display, music playback, or the jackpot confirmation notification, and the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The reach performance of SP Reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. Therefore, the vibration performance by the operation unit performance has a higher jackpot reliability than the reach performance of SP Reach A, and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state when executed is higher. The moving body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A are all executed as part of the reach performance, so they do not have individual jackpot reliability. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is a performance that definitely notifies that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type selection CH1, CH2 differ from effects with a high jackpot reliability, such as the reach effect of SP Reach A, in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this way, for a specific effect that has a high jackpot reliability among multiple specific effects, it is sufficient that the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit performance than when the specific effect is executed. Also, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit performance than when the vibration effect is not executed by the operation unit performance.

Figure 12-16 shows an example of the performance of effects achieved by illuminating the game effect lamps 9. The game effect lamps 9 include an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2. Here, multiple performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the mode of performance execution by illuminating the lights.

In performance execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to red in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In the performance execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in red to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors due to the illumination effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13 includes an illumination effect in which the illumination color becomes rainbow in conjunction with the vibration effect.

In performance execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white display color from left to right, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated to change from black to white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated white by a lighting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a lighting effect in which the light color changes to white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In performance execution example AKF04, when the text display on the image display device 5 is blue, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in blue to match the text display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color becomes white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

For example, a predetermined performance by displaying background display, text display, or any other performance image on the image display device 5 can be executed according to the progress of the game, including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the performance processing during variable display executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing, the control data read from the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting processing is used to control the execution of a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, such as the variable display. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. If an operation unit performance is executed during the execution of such a predetermined performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 can light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance in the operation unit performance. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the control data read from the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the execution of the operation unit performance. This control data includes lamp control data for controlling the emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. In response to the emission performance associated with the vibration performance in such an operation unit performance, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a different light emission mode from the light emission performance of the operation unit performance in accordance with a predetermined performance. In this way, by making the emission modes different between the operation members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and the other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N, the performance by light emission can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

The predetermined performance may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in a color that matches the audio output, such as background music, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in a color that matches the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound that is a message that gives the player an impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in red that matches the audio output, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in white by the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. Even in this way, by making the light-emitting modes of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A different from those of the other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N different, the light-emitting effects can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. The predetermined effect may be to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and make the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. non-illuminated (turned off). When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased to the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 12-17 shows an example of the setting of the performance period in which a specific linked performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in association with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in association with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects using vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with the playback of music in the reach effect of SP Reach A. The specific linked effects that can be executed in period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B changes from blue to red to gold in conjunction with the special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV43.

The period AKZ04 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific linked effects executable during period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B becomes rainbow-colored in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44. The jackpot confirmation notification may be any notification that allows the player to recognize a jackpot by stopping and displaying a confirmed decorative pattern that results in the display of a decorative pattern, displaying a performance image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach presentation, outputting a jackpot confirmation notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R, turning on a jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these.

In addition, following the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, a specific link performance may be executed during the period AKZ04 associated with the jackpot confirmation notification. In this case, the specific link performance associated with the jackpot confirmation notification can be executed while the operation unit performance heightens the player's sense of expectation, thereby enhancing the impression of the performance and improving the interest in playing. When executing a specific link performance following such an operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance or the special vibration performance may be different between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance, or the light emission mode of the light emission performance or the specific light emission performance may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration performance and the special vibration performance. The light emission brightness may be different between the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance. By making the vibration mode and light emission mode different to give the performance a sharp contrast, the difference between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance can be easily recognized, the performance can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in playing can be improved.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. Specific linked effects that can be executed during the period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes white in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed. Specific linked effects that can be executed during the period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

Figures 12-18 to 12-20 show cases where the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Figure 12-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when a movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 12-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when an image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 12-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when a music is played in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the reach mode and the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position at the lower front end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Next, when the reach performance of the SP reach A is started by the reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, as in the performance execution example AKG01, and the movable body operation is performed. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linear movement or parallel movement upward from the initial position, and a performance image showing a message such as "SP reach A" is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window part provided inside the movable body 32. After that, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the performance execution example AKG02. At this time, a performance image showing a message such as "This change is ..." is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window part of the movable body 32.

As the position of the movable body 32 is changed, as in the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed along with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17. Furthermore, when the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the performance execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ01 ends. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen, which is the initial position, is 2500 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that becomes an on period in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrates every 250 milliseconds and an off period in which no vibration occurs. Also, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that continuously lights up the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in blue over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that switches between blue light (on) and no light (off) every 250 milliseconds.

When the movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a light pattern in which the light color and light brightness gradually change from bottom to top as the position of the movable body 32 is changed. For example, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a blue light color and with a light brightness that changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time.

After the movable body operation is completed as in performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in performance execution example AKG11, as an image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. At this time, for example, text display showing the message "Super Hot" is displayed in a gold display color. Also, as in performance execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added around the text display.

In conjunction with the display of the performance image, which is an image display such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed in conjunction with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold during the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. 12-17. When the display of the text indicating the message ends and the display of the performance image in the reach performance different from the text display begins, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking performance in the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the text display indicating the message "Super Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ02. Also, during period AKZ02, a specific light-emitting effect may be performed with the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B alternately repeating a first luminance with a high gold light emission brightness and a second luminance with a low light emission brightness every 10 milliseconds.

When image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, for example, to match the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 and the emission color of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, with the display of a performance image resulting in an image display such as performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, and when the display of a performance image such as performance execution example AKG13 begins, they may emit light of a color different from gold.

After the display of a performance image as in performance execution example AKG13 has begun, the sound of music phrase PH01 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A as in performance execution example AKG21. Next, the sound of music phrase PH02 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG22. After that, the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG23. In this way, by outputting the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 in sequence as the performance progresses, it is possible to execute the overall music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

In conjunction with the output of sound that results in music playback as in performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific linked performance is executed, causing the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to vibrate and emit light. The specific linked performance executed in conjunction with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV43 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color changes from blue to red and then from red to gold during the period AKZ03 shown in FIG. 12-17. In performance execution example AKG21, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes blue in response to the sound output of music phrase PH01. In performance execution example AKG22, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes red in response to the sound output of music phrase PH02. In performance execution example AKG23, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes gold in response to the sound output of music phrase PH03. In this way, it is possible to execute a specific light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to multiple colors as the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 are output in sequence as the effect progresses.

Figure 12-21 shows a music playback execution example AKH01 in which the scales change in sequence as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in Figure 12-21 (A), during a period AKZ03 in which a specific linked performance can be executed in conjunction with music playback, sounds corresponding to the scales of Do, Re, Mi, Fa, So, La, Si, and Do are output by speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of Do output last needs to be one octave higher than the scale of Do output first.

Such a specific linked performance associated with music playback includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color changes as shown in FIG. 12-21(B) and a vibration performance in which the special vibration performance is based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 12-21(C), and can be executed during a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration performance shown in FIG. 12-21(C) is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. In the specific light-emitting performance associated with this special vibration performance, the light-emitting color of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 changes in sequence between blue, red, and gold in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration performance, as shown in FIG. 12-21(B). During the stop period of the sound output and the off period of the special vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may not emit light and may be turned off. Note that during the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale, the light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting performance may be different for each scale. For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously illuminated in blue over a period corresponding to the scale of C that is first output. Next, during a period corresponding to the scale of D, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between a first luminance with a high red illumination luminance and a second luminance with a low red illumination luminance. After that, during a period corresponding to the scale of E, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between gold illumination (lit) and non-illumination (unlit). In this way, by providing illumination modes with different amounts of illumination for each illumination color corresponding to each scale, the presentation can be appropriately diversified and interest in the game can be increased.

The reach performance of SP Reach A is controlled to be executable by using the control data read from the variable display performance control pattern in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display performance control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is set to be able to execute a specific linked performance in association with a specific performance such as the movable body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A by the lamp control data and vibration control data. In the specific linked performance, a special vibration performance can be executed by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration form is different between the special vibration performance by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance by the vibration pattern in the operation unit performance. In this way, the vibration form is different between the vibration performance in the operation unit performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific linked performance that can be executed in association with the execution of the specific performance, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When an operation section performance is executed, a vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is accompanied by a light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a specific linked performance is executed, a specific light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is executed in conjunction with a special vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. By executing a performance that includes vibration and light emission of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, for example, a player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 will recognize the vibration and light emission of the operation members that are different from the image display, and the unexpectedness of the performance will be enhanced.

During the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movement of movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP Reach A. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect during the movement period of movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the period AKZ04 shown in FIG. 12-17, in response to a confirmed jackpot notification, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific linkage effects include specific light emission effects in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 light up in association with a special vibration effect produced by one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects in the operation unit effects and the specific light emission effects accompanying the special vibration effects in the specific linkage effects have different light emission patterns, such as light emission color. In this way, by making the light emission patterns different depending on the operation unit effects and the specific linkage effects, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, and the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are executed at different times and have different vibration patterns. Also, the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the pre-variation, and the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are white, red, or rainbow, so that the light emission patterns of the light emission patterns are the same. In this way, by providing cases where the vibration patterns of the vibration effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different, while the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are the same, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, are executed in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the operation unit effects are executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning time judgment result, which is the pre-reading judgment result. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit effects are executed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 12-10 and FIG. 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start of the pre-variation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the light emission color is white and when the light emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effects is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby appropriately diversifying the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increasing the interest in the game. Note that when the light emission color is red and when the light emission color is rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance patterns used to execute the continuous preview performance include operation unit performance patterns in which the light emission color of the light emission performance differs depending on whether the remaining number is other than "0" or "0". For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) includes an operation unit performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number is "1" and an operation unit performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number is "0". The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes white. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission mode is different between the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. In this way, by providing different lighting conditions for the lighting effects when the timing for executing the operation section effects differs, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous notice performance, the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is set to prevent the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large from being lower than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), if the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". If the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 or the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". This prevents the operation unit performance with a low jackpot reliability from being executed later at the start of the target fluctuation, etc., even though the operation unit performance with a high jackpot reliability was executed first at the start of the pre-variation, so that the player's expectations are not lowered and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white, and when the light emission color is white, light emission and non-emission are repeated in accordance with the on and off periods of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted continuously in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white. When the light emission color is white, light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03. Since the on period settings are different for the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the light emission patterns, such as the light emission period of the light emission effects, are different. Even in this way, it is sufficient to provide cases where the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different.

(Modifications of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation unit performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific linked performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The timing of execution of the operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. The timing of execution of the specific linked performance, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the timing of execution of the operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree related to the game in the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such advantageous degree. The timing of execution of the specific linked performance, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree related to the game in the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such advantageous degree.

The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different and when it is common, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance is different and when it is common, when the jackpot reliability is different and when it is common, etc., can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of execution is different and when it is common between the operation unit performance and the specific linked performance, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance and the special vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance is different and when it is common, can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission performance by making the light emission mode of the light emission performance common. When the light emission modes of the light emission performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making the vibration mode of the vibration performance common. When some vibration modes in the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making other vibration modes in the vibration performance common. For example, if the vibration intensities in the vibration effects are different, the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by standardizing the vibration cycles in the vibration effects. If some of the light emission patterns in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing other light emission patterns in the light emission effects. For example, if the light emission colors in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing the light emission cycles in the light emission effects. The control burden can also be reduced by similar standardization for the vibration patterns of special vibration effects and the light emission patterns of specific light emission effects.

In addition to or instead of during execution of the variable display, when the game is controlled to any game state such as a small win game state or a big win game state, the operation unit performance or the specific linked performance may be executable. For example, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of the V winning attacker opening, the opening time, the number of openings, or the number of rounds of the big win game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. When the game is controlled to a big win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the big win game state, the end conditions, the presence or absence of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the big win game state, and the amount of increase. Specific linked performance may be executed in conjunction with specific performances such as moving objects, image display, and music playback in the small win game state or the big win game state.

The specific effect capable of executing a specific linked effect may be any effect that can be executed in response to the execution of the variable display, or any effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, when a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" at a certain rate and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, the specific linked effect may be executable during some or all of the effect period.

When controlled to any presentation state, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations. For example, when controlled to a presentation state that is a special presentation mode, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations at a higher rate than when controlled to a presentation state that is a presentation mode other than the special presentation mode.

The operating member capable of executing effects by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects the operation of a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects the touch operation or pressing operation on a touch panel. In addition, a sensor that can detect a predetermined motion by the player, such as an infrared sensor, ultrasonic sensor, CCD sensor, or CMOS sensor, may be used. The motion of the player may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands, etc. using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can detect the predetermined motion of the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically may be used. In addition to such a motion detection member, a contact member that the player can contact with his/her hand, etc. may be provided, and the contact member may be vibrated or illuminated together with or separately from the motion detection member.

The vibration effects included in the operation unit performance may correspond to the vibration effect in the characteristic part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK, and the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit performance, the vibration effect included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit performance, the vibration effect included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The light emission effect included in the operation unit performance may correspond to the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the characteristic part 48AK, the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK, and the light emission effect accompanying the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01 to AKT03, which is the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The special vibration effect included in the specific linked effect may correspond to the special vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving patterns, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving patterns, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing pattern, a lottery random number for a big win pattern, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time will be saved.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving pattern may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but only in the low probability/low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving times may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated will be updated.

The time it takes for the time-saving symbol to be confirmed may also be different from the time it takes for the other symbols to be confirmed.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
The gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and includes an operating means operable by a player, a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and a light-emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operating means emits light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern. The fact that the rate of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, in the light colors and vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be common between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common, for example, when the light emission color is white. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11 or AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing, and is capable of executing a vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute a visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute a visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest in the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player includes an operating means operable by a player, a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as vibration effects in which the operating means vibrates, a light-emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect in accordance with the progress of a game, and the proportion of the game being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the game being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration state differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko game machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the operation unit effect control pattern or the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light-emitting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific effect may be, for example, the reach effect of SP reach A, the big win confirmation notification, the big win type lottery, etc. The specific effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher the rate of control to an advantageous state when a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the higher the probability of control to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to an operation unit performance pattern. The different rate of control to an advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which a predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the application of the operation unit performance pattern. The ability to execute a special vibration effect may be, for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The different vibration modes between a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11, AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the different vibration mode may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., different from the vibration patterns AKV21, AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a predetermined vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing that is later than the first timing, and is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest in the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The execution of the predetermined vibration effect may have a higher rate of being controlled to an advantageous state than the execution of the specific effect. Here, the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation rate of 50% or more, which is higher than the execution of the reach effect of SP Reach A.
In such a configuration, the player's anticipation for the specified vibration effects can be heightened, improving his/her interest in the game.

The specific effect execution means may execute an effect of moving a movable member as the specific effect, and the vibration effect execution means may execute a special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the control is in an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notification of a confirmed jackpot. The special vibration effect in response to this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The light emission effect execution means can execute a specific light emission effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with a special vibration effect, and the light emission form may be different between the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emission effect associated with the special vibration effect. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission form may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, different from when the light emission color changes from blue or gold, or from blue to red and then to gold.
According to such a configuration, the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A limiting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when the operation unit effect is determined in step AKS202.
According to this configuration, the vibration effects can be appropriately executed to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a vibration effect execution means that can execute a first vibration effect and a second vibration effect as vibration effects that vibrate the operating means, and a light-emitting effect execution means that can execute a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect, and the timing of execution of the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect are different, and the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect is common to the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission performance may be, for example, the lighting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light emission performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is different according to the light emission state of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the timing of execution is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a pre-variation start timing AKT01 to AKT03 that is different from the target variation start timing AKT11. The fact that the vibration mode is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 that is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission performance is common between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a case where the light emission color included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at a timing when the developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached the reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a second vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the second vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a text image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the second vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing, and is capable of executing the second vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the result of the look-ahead determination. Here, the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory may be, for example, a variable display that is a pre-variable.

The light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the first vibration performance includes a first vibration light emission mode and a second vibration light emission mode different from the first vibration light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the first vibration performance may be different when the light emission performance is performed in the first vibration light emission mode and when the light emission performance is performed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the first vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission performance associated with the first vibration performance and the light emission performance associated with the second vibration performance. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous performance pattern, the light emission color of the operation unit performance pattern is different from that when the remaining number of times is "0".
In such a configuration, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each of the features 48AK to 50AK may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information, and includes an operation means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates, which includes a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, a vibration motor by vibration control data included in a variable display effect control pattern). a vibration effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the performance process during variable display in step S172 using vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern or the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203, etc.), and a light emission effect execution means (e.g., a light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 with a light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern, etc.) that causes the operation means to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect ... control pattern, etc.) and a specific effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the performance process during variable display of step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute specific effects (e.g., a reach effect of SP reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game, and the rate at which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled to the advantageous state is higher (e.g., a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit performance pattern, etc.) when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. ), the proportion controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission state of the light emission effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the purpose of the operation unit performance pattern, etc.), the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and the vibration state differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.),
moreover,
The game control system includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) capable of controlling the game to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means so that the numerical information corresponds to the special number of times. and the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS71).
According to this configuration, the player can be attracted to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect, thereby improving the interest of the player. Furthermore, the player can be rescued in a suitable manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any of the identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, so the player can be rescued more easily, and the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In other words, it is possible to draw attention to the light emission mode with a high probability of controlling a predetermined vibration effect to an advantageous state, whether it is executed at the execution timing of the vibration effect, and whether a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific effect, thereby improving the interest in the game, and since the numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is easier for the numerical information to reach the special number of times and the player to be rescued than when, for example, the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, so that the motivation to play can be increased. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to attract the interest of players when installed in an amusement facility and can improve the motivation of players to play.

The vibration effect may also be associated with the numerical information of the update means. For example, a vibration effect may be executed when the numerical information reaches a specific number of times. In this way, it is possible to clearly notify that a specific number of times has been reached.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of increasing interest, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that has state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a part executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a part executing steps 100IWS75 and 100IWS76 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); a predetermined suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined suggestion performance (for example, a notice performance) when the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-49, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120); and a control of a special state is started based on the establishment of a special condition. Examples of gaming machines include a special notification effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638 as shown in FIG. 14-23) that can execute a special notification effect that notifies a player that a certain condition is about to be established (for example, a background image changes as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C1) and (C2), a blackout occurs when the fluctuation starts as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B), or a blackout occurs when the fluctuation ends as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C)), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in FIG. 14-44. See FIG. 14-50). Examples of the form of this gaming machine are described below as other examples.

(Other examples)

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include setting a stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), an initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S909). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the states of various timers, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), an initialization process (step S908) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S905). In step S905, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S908) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S907). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Next, the gaming machine according to Example 1 in the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 14-1 to 14-47.

(Board configuration)
Fig. 14-1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 108IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in Fig. 1, a right-hit LED 100IW10 is provided below the normal reserve display 25C as shown in Fig. 14-1. Also, as shown in Fig. 14-1, a right-hit notification LED 100IW20 is provided to the right of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, fourth pattern displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth pattern display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the first special pattern. Also, the fourth pattern display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the second special pattern. In this example, the fourth pattern display devices 100IW21a and 21b are each composed of two LEDs arranged above and below, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed by these two LEDs repeatedly turning on and off alternately.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic section 108IW, instead of the pass gate 41 shown in FIG. 1, a pass gate 100IW41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. In this characteristic section 108IW, a normal game is executed based on the game ball passing through the pass gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this characteristic section 108IW, since the probability of a normal hit increases in the probability of a special state or time-saving state, it is advantageous to perform a firing operation (right-hitting operation) aimed at the right of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state in this characteristic section 108IW, it is advantageous to perform a firing operation (left-hitting operation) aimed at the left of the game area.

(Probability of winning, probability of losing the time-saving feature)
FIG. 14-2 and FIG. 14-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the probability of a big win and the probability of a time-saving miss for each setting value. Among these, FIG. 14-2 shows the probability of a big win and the probability of a time-saving miss when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 14-3 shows the probability of a big win and the probability of a time-saving miss when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured to be able to set any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the probability of a big win is different), and it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value by executing a setting confirmation process or a setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-2 and FIG. 14-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting value is configured to be able to be changed to six stages from "1" to "6". It is to be noted that the setting is not limited to being able to be changed to six stages, and may be configured to be able to be changed to, for example, two to five stages or seven or more stages.

As shown in Figures 14-2 (A) and 14-3 (A), when the first special symbol variable display is executed and when the second special symbol variable display is executed, in the non-probability variable state (low probability state (normal state or time-saving state)), the setting value of "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), making it the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2," setting value "3," setting value "4," and setting value "5," with setting value "6" having the highest jackpot probability of "242/65536" (approximately 1/270), making it the most favorable setting for the player.

As shown in Fig. 14-2(B) and Fig. 14-3(B), in both cases where the first special symbol variable display is executed and where the second special symbol variable display is executed, in the high probability state (high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" (approximately 1/32), making it the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2," setting value "3," setting value "4," and setting value "5," and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "2420/65536" (approximately 1/27), making it the most favorable setting for the player. As shown in Fig. 14-2 and Fig. 14-3, in this example, in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is increased by 10 times compared to the non-high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, the probability of the time-saving miss is constant at 164/65536 (approximately 1/400) regardless of the setting value between 1 and 6 (and furthermore regardless of whether the game is in a special state or not). As shown in FIG. 14-3, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, the probability of the time-saving miss is constant at 328/65536 (approximately 1/200) regardless of the setting value between 1 and 6 (and furthermore regardless of whether the game is in a special state or not). In other words, in this example, the judgment value for judging the time-saving miss is common regardless of the setting value.

Even if the jackpot probability is varied according to the setting value as described above while the loss probability without time-saving is constant, the number of judgment values for each setting value can be made consistent by varying the loss probability without time-saving for setting values "1" to "6" as shown in Figures 14-2 and 14-3.

The game may also be configured to be controllable to a small win game state. If the game is configured to be able to determine a small win as well, the game may be configured so that the probability of a small win is constant, regardless of the setting value, for example, between "1" and "6."

In addition, if the configuration is such that small wins can also be determined, it may be configured so that there is a small win with time reduction that is controlled to a time-saving state when a small win occurs.

The examples shown in Figures 14-2 and 14-3 are merely examples, and various modes are possible for setting the jackpot probability and the time-saving miss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in Figures 14-2 and 14-3, the time-saving miss probability is approximately 1/400 when the first special symbol variable display is executed, and the time-saving miss probability is approximately 1/200 when the second special symbol variable display is executed. However, conversely, it may be configured so that the time-saving miss probability is approximately 1/200 when the first special symbol variable display is executed, and the time-saving miss probability is approximately 1/400 when the second special symbol variable display is executed.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 14-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 14-4(A) shows a specific example of a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 14-4(B) shows a specific example of a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, to determine the type of jackpot as either a "normal jackpot," a "variable jackpot," or a "sudden variable jackpot" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, in order to determine the type of jackpot as either a "normal jackpot," a "variable jackpot," or a "sudden variable jackpot" based on a random number for type determination.

A "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 15-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When the game transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the 100-time variable display ends or the next jackpot occurs.

A "high probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a 15-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a high probability jackpot state after the jackpot game state ends. When transitioning to the high probability jackpot state, the high probability jackpot state is maintained until the 100 variable display cycles are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In this example, when the high probability jackpot state is controlled, the state is also controlled to a time-saving state.

A "sudden jackpot with a high probability of occurring" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a high probability of occurring after the jackpot game state ends. When the state transitions to a high probability of occurring, the high probability of occurring state is maintained until the 100 variable display cycles are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In this example, when the state is controlled to a high probability of occurring state, the state is also controlled to a time-saving state.

In this example, in the case of a "normal jackpot" or a "probable jackpot", in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game, the large prize opening is controlled to be open until 29 seconds have passed or a predetermined number of game balls (10 in this example) have entered (therefore, the large prize opening is opened for a long period of time 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "sudden probable jackpot", in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game, the large prize opening is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds (therefore, the large prize opening is opened for a short period of time twice). Therefore, in the case of a "sudden probable jackpot", it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to enter the large prize opening, and it can be made to appear as if the game has suddenly switched to a probable jackpot state.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, there is a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "normal jackpot", a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "probable jackpot", and a 20% probability that it is determined to be a "sudden probable jackpot". Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, there is a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "normal jackpot", a 55% probability that it is determined to be a "probable jackpot", and a 5% probability that it is determined to be a "sudden probable jackpot".

(Time-saving type determination table)
Fig. 14-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, Fig. 14-5 (A) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Fig. 14-5 (B) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14-5(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a time-saving miss symbol, in order to determine the time-saving type as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C," based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 14-5(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made to make the variable display result a time-saving miss symbol in order to determine the time-saving type as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in Figures 14-5 (A) and (B), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed and the time-saving effect is missed, and when the second special symbol is displayed and the time-saving effect is missed, there is a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss A," a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss B," and a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss C."

The example shown in FIG. 14-5 is just one example, and various methods for determining the time-saving type are conceivable. For example, when the time-saving miss is determined based on the first special symbol changing display, the probability of determining "Time-saving miss C" is increased, while when the time-saving miss is determined based on the second special symbol changing display, the probability of determining "Time-saving miss A" is increased. In this way, the rate of determining the time-saving type may be different when the first special symbol changing display is executed and when the second special symbol changing display is executed.

In addition, for example, if the system is configured to be able to determine whether the time-saving feature has been lost even during a time-saving feature that has been used for rescue time-saving features, the system may be configured so that the time-saving feature count counter, etc. is not overwritten uniformly even if the time-saving feature has been lost, or the system may be configured so that the time-saving feature count counter, etc. is or is not overwritten depending on the type of time-saving feature that has been lost.

Figure 14-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of time-saving. As shown in Figure 14-6, in this example, in the normal state, if "time-saving miss A" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times, if "time-saving miss B" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 50 times, and if "time-saving miss C" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 30 times. Also, in the time-saving state, if "time-saving miss A" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled until the next big win, if "time-saving miss B" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times, and if "time-saving miss C" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times. Also, in the normal state and the time-saving state, if a rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 800 times.

In this example, as described later, there is no case where the time-saving feature is determined to be a miss during the special probability state. Also, in this example, as described later, there is no case where the time-saving feature is determined to be a miss even during the time-saving feature due to the rescue time-saving feature. Also, in this example, as described later, after the rescue time-saving feature has been controlled to a time-saving feature of 800 times, if no jackpot occurs even after the 800 fluctuation displays have ended, the rescue time-saving feature will again be controlled to a time-saving feature of 800 times (rescue time-saving feature). Therefore, the number of times the time-saving feature has been controlled due to the rescue time-saving feature will essentially be until the next jackpot occurs.

Here, the rescue time-saving achievement rate for each set value will be explained. The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by making n (800) fluctuations without being controlled to a jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.
K = (1-ML)n = {(P-1)÷P}n
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of activations)

For example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 8.1%; if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/310, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 7.5%; if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.9%; if the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.3%; if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.7%; if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the rescue time reduction achievement rate. This makes it possible to rescue the player even if the set value of the jackpot probability is low.

In addition, the method of controlling the number of time-saving times when the time-saving miss occurs is not limited to that shown in FIG. 14-6. For example, even if the same time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control the number of time-saving times to be the same at 100 times during both the normal state and the time-saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control the number of time-saving times to 100 times during the normal state and to 0 times during the time-saving state (i.e., the state falls from the time-saving state to the normal state). In this way, various modes are conceivable for controlling the number of time-saving times when the time-saving miss occurs.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
14-7 and 14-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 108IW. Among these, FIG. 14-7(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for a jackpot. Also, FIG. 14-7(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss in a normal state. Also, FIG. 14-7(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss in a time-saving state controlled via a jackpot. Also, FIG. 14-7(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for a miss in a time-saving state controlled via a miss in a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 14-8 (E) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table E for a miss during a time-saving state controlled via a rescue time-saving. Also, FIG. 14-8 (F) and (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before a rescue time-saving. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 14-8 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less. Also, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 14-8 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more.

Figure 14-8 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for when a player misses during a high probability state. However, in this example, even if the player is in a high probability state or a time-saving state, if the number of reserved memories is not 1 or more (if there are no reserved memories), the fluctuation pattern is determined using fluctuation pattern table B.

Figure 14-8 (I) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table I for a miss in the fluctuation display that results in a rescue time reduction. Figure 14-8 (J) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table J for a jackpot in the fluctuation display that results in a rescue time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 14-7(A), in this example, when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), in this example, if a miss occurs during normal conditions, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-7(C), in this example, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (D), in this example, when a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figures 14-7 (C), 14-7 (D), and 14-8 (E), in this example, during the time-saving state, the rate at which fluctuation patterns PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), and PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than during the normal state. Furthermore, even during the same time-saving state, during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss, the selection probability of fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Furthermore, during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving state, the selection rate of fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 99%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With this configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the rate at which the variable display is executed using variable pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened variable) increases, shortening the period until the next jackpot is controlled, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Also, as shown in Fig. 14-7 (C), Fig. 14-7 (D), and Fig. 14-8 (E), in this example, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than in Fig. 14-7 (C), and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Also, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, unlike the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, there is no case where the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined, and there is no case where the super reach is executed. In other words, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, unlike the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, there is no case where the super reach is executed at the time of the miss, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the time-saving is rescued (i.e., when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the super reach does not result in a miss, so the decline in interest can be suppressed. Also, the time until the next big win is controlled is shortened, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed. In this example, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the super reach is not executed when there is a miss, but it may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the super reach may be executed at a lower rate when there is a miss than in the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the big win. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time-saving is started (i.e., when no big win has occurred for a long period of time), the rate at which the super reach will result in a miss is reduced, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8(F), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is high at 95%. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8(G), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is high at 95%.

Also, as shown in Fig. 14-8 (F) and (G), if there is a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, there is no case where the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is determined, and the Super Reach is not executed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the Super Reach fluctuation display is executed in the period immediately before the rescue time reduction but does not result in a jackpot. In addition, even if there is a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, it may be determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β). For example, within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, it may be determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) at the time of a miss at a lower rate than in the period immediately before the rescue time reduction (i.e., the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in Fig. 14-7 (C)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (H), in this example, if a miss occurs during a special probability state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 14-8 (H), in this example, during the special bonus state, there is a high probability of 90% that the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) will be determined, and the average fluctuation time will be even shorter than during the time-shortened state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (I), in this example, when the display is a variable that results in a rescue time reduction and is a miss, the variable pattern is determined to be the variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing). In other words, the variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing) is not used for variable displays that do not result in a rescue time reduction, but is a variable pattern exclusively for rescue time reduction, used only for variable displays that result in a rescue time reduction (miss). In this example, when the variable pattern is determined to be the variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing), a time reduction entry performance (see, for example, FIG. 14-38 (G) and (H)) is executed to notify the player that the time reduction state (i.e., rescue time reduction) will be controlled, as described later. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time reduction state has been reached and that the time reduction state will be controlled, and it is possible to increase the interest when the rescue time reduction state is reached.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (J), in this example, when the display is a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction and does not result in a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined to be PA3-2 (seeming jackpot). In other words, the variable pattern PA3-2 (seeming jackpot) is not used for variable displays that do not result in a rescue time reduction, but is a variable pattern exclusively for rescue time reduction that is used only for variable displays (jackpots) that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the variable pattern PA3-2 (seeming jackpot) is determined, as described below, a display that is the same as the time reduction entry display (see, for example, FIG. 14-38 (G) and (H)) that notifies the player that the time reduction state (i.e. rescue time reduction) will be controlled (see, for example, FIG. 14-41 (H')) is executed, and then a display that notifies the player that a jackpot will be entered (see, for example, FIG. 14-41 (H')) is executed. With this configuration, once the player realizes that the rescue time has been shortened, they are informed that they will hit a jackpot, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases their interest.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 14-7 and 14-8 is just one example, and various modes are possible. For example, if the time-saving state is lost during the time-saving state and the state is controlled to be in the time-saving state again, the fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same table as the fluctuation pattern table C for losses during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot shown in Figure 14-7 (C).

Also, for example, only when the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot in the case of a time-saving miss (in this example, when time-saving miss A occurs during the time-saving state), the fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same table as fluctuation pattern table C for misses during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot shown in FIG. 14-7 (C).

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, which is an extremely short fluctuation of 1.5 seconds, is high, and the speed at which the fluctuation display is consumed is fast, so there are few types of preview effects and pre-reading preview effects that can be executed. For example, during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, effects such as displaying an effect image at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, lighting up lamps or LEDs, outputting a specified sound effect or a sound that stops the fluctuation that is different from normal are executed.

In addition, this example shows a case where a fluctuation pattern table E is provided specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, without providing a fluctuation pattern table E specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 14-7 (C)) for the time-saving state via a jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the variation pattern table F or G (see FIG. 14-8 (F) or (G)) is switched to, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the reach rate gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases, or the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested only when the number of remaining fluctuations is a dividing line such as 100 or 200.

In addition, in this example, the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a miss, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state are configured to use different fluctuation pattern tables (i.e., the average fluctuation time is different), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in all cases (i.e., the average fluctuation time is the same), or the average fluctuation time may be longer for the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state than for the time-saving state via a jackpot or a miss time-saving state.

(Performance control command)
14-9 and 14-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the performance control command sent to the performance control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 14-9 and FIG. 14-10, the command 80XX(H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. The performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 80XX(H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 specification command) (miss specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be a miss (no time reduction).

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 2 designation command) (time-saving miss A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is to be time-saving miss A. Command 9002 (H) is a performance control command (display result 3 designation command) (time-saving miss B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is to be time-saving miss C. Command 9003 (H) is a performance control command (display result 4 designation command) (time-saving miss C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is to be time-saving miss C.

Command 9004 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 6 designation command (variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a guaranteed jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 7 designation command (sudden guaranteed jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a sudden guaranteed jackpot.

Command 95XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In this example, a value according to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is 1, command 9501 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, command 957E (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Note that in this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is 127 or more, the maximum value 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and command 957F (H) is uniformly sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 96XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the number of remaining changes (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In this example, a value corresponding to the number of remaining changes (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the number of remaining changes is 800, command 9608 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 97XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery) that designates the number of remaining fluctuations (in units of 100) until rescue time reduction occurs when power is restored. In this example, when power is restored, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery and transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until rescue time reduction occurs when power is restored is 100 or less, command 9701 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is between 701 and 800, command 9708 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction can be transmitted in units of one time up to 126 times, and when the remaining number is 127 times or more, it is transmitted in units of 100 times, but this is not limited to the above. For example, two commands may be transmitted in combination so that it is possible to transmit in units of one time even when the remaining number is 127 times or more.

Command A000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command A100 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command B000 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that specifies the end of a jackpot game.

Command B1XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying while the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display during a round during a jackpot game. The number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX." Command B2XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying after the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display after a round during a jackpot game (displaying the interval between rounds).

Command B400 (H) is a presentation control command (large prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening.

Command C000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C001 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has decreased by 1. Command C101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has decreased by 1.

Command E000 (H) is a presentation control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when a jackpot game ends. Command E002 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when the time-saving state is lost. Command E003 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state during a rescue time-saving state. Command E004 (H) is a presentation control command (probability variable state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the probability variable state.

Command E100 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification start command) that specifies the start of the right hit notification. Command E101 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification end command) that specifies the end of the right hit notification.

Command F000 (H) is a presentation control command (a customer waiting demo designation command) that designates the start of displaying a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is sent, for example, when no reserved memory is stored (i.e., when the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the pattern determination period and at the end of the big win game. The customer waiting demo designation command is also sent, for example, when the power is turned on (when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). In addition, for example, when transitioning to a setting change mode in which a setting change process is executed or a setting confirmation mode in which a setting confirmation process is executed, a setting value designation command is sent after the end of each mode, and then a customer waiting demo designation command is sent. In addition, when the recovery process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer waiting demo designation command is sent when none of the big win game, small win game, and special game are executed and no reserved memory is stored. As described below, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command, if 10 seconds pass without receiving any other commands, such as a performance control command at the time of the start winning, it starts displaying a telop indicating that the rescue time-saving function is installed (in this example, whether or not to display a telop is determined by lottery). In addition, if 3 minutes pass without receiving any other commands after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, it starts playing a demonstration movie.

The command F1XX (H) is a performance control command (setting value specification command) that specifies the currently set setting value. Note that the value equivalent to the setting value is set in "XX".

When the presentation control CPU 120 (specifically, the presentation control CPU 120) mounted on the presentation control board 12 receives the above-mentioned presentation control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it changes the display state of the image display device 5 according to the contents shown in Figures 14-9 and 14-10, changes the display state of the lamp, and outputs sound number data to the sound control board 13. Note that presentation control commands other than those shown in Figures 14-9 and 14-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. For example, more detailed presentation control commands related to jackpot games and presentation control commands indicating the game status (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
14-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process in the characteristic unit 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, steps S8 to S9, and steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when a presentation control command instructing recovery from power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs, sets a value according to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter, and controls to send a rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 controls to send command 9701 (H) as the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery. Also, for example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 controls to send command 9708 (H) as the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery process is executed, the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery is transmitted, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the current rescue time reduction is notified. In addition, a time saving rescue can be achieved by executing a variable display based on the reserved memory restored by the recovery process (i.e., the reserved memory stored before the power outage). This configuration can reduce the disadvantage to the player when a power outage occurs in a situation where reserved memory corresponding to a variable display that will result in a time saving rescue was stored before the power outage.

In this example, a command for specifying the number of times to shorten the time for recovery is sent separately from the command at the time of recovery when the power is restored after a power outage, but this is not limited to this form. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of recovery (e.g., a command for specifying power on) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time for recovery is shortened, and then sent.

Also, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800". That is, in this example, after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, if neither a jackpot nor a time reduction miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles, the rescue time reduction is entered and the machine is controlled to the time reduction state. Note that, in this example, the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter can be specified based on the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9.

In this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. The rescue time-saving counter may not be initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time-saving flags A to C indicating the time-saving state, the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state, and the reserved memory may be initialized, while the value of the rescue time-saving counter may be restored. In this way, the game can be started from the state where the value of the rescue time-saving counter of the previous day continues, so that the investment amount until the rescue time-saving is reached can be reduced and a configuration can be made that does not disadvantage the player. In addition, the rescue time-saving counter can be prevented from being intentionally initialized, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected as being on (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is performed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 14-12 and FIG. 14-13 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 or not (step 100IWS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 100IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this characteristic part 108IW, the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the display of the second special symbol changes is executed with priority over the display of the first special symbol changes. In other words, the second start condition for starting the display of the second special symbol changes is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the display of the first special symbol changes.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 100IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figures 14-2 and 14-3) with the random number for hit determination, and decides that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating a probability variable state is not set (if the state is a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the low probability jackpot determination value (see Figures 14-2 (A) and 14-3 (A)). Furthermore, if the probability flag is set (high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the high probability jackpot determination value (see FIG. 14-2(B) and FIG. 14-3(B)). If the value of the random number for jackpot determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 14-2 and FIG. 14-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred (step 100IWS64). The CPU 103 then determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, guaranteed jackpot, or sudden guaranteed jackpot) that corresponds to the value that matches the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not decided to hit the jackpot (N in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state is 0 (step 100IWS66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 100IWS67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable ends (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 100IWS70, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 100IWS70. In this case, for example, in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "800" (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by 1 extra, so in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, the value of the time-saving counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "901", which is 1 more than the previous value, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 100IWS71). In this example, the process of step 100IWS71 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time reduction state, or the probability change state. In this example, the process of step 100IWS71 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special symbol variable display is executed or the second special symbol variable display is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9501 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 957E (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that the time reduction state will be controlled at the end of the fluctuation (step 100IWS75). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 100IWS77). Note that whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter in the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9601 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9608 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and execute the teasing presentation, countdown presentation, and effect presentation described below.

In addition, for example, as described below, when a rescue time reduction occurs, the rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "800"), and in a configuration in which rescue time reductions can occur consecutively, the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may be sent only when a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may not be sent when a rescue time reduction occurs the second time or later.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the state is a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS79). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the state is a time-saving state via rescue time-saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS79, if the state is a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, it is determined that the state is a miss without time-saving, without carrying out the process of determining whether the time-saving has been missed in step 100IWS81 and thereafter.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the time-saving state is not uniformly determined to be a miss, not only during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but also during the time-saving state via a jackpot and during the time-saving state via a miss. In other words, not only when time-saving flag C is set, but also when time-saving flag A or time-saving flag B is set, the process of determining whether the time-saving state has not been reached after step 100IWS81 may not be performed, and it may be decided that the state is a miss without time-saving.

Conversely, even during a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the processing from step 100IWS81 onwards may be executed to determine whether or not the time-saving state has been exceeded. Also, it may be configured so that both rescue time-saving and time-saving deviations may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured so that the time-saving state is controlled with priority given to rescue time-saving, or it may be configured so that the time-saving state is controlled with priority given to deviations from time-saving.

If the time-saving flag C is not set (i.e., the game is not in a time-saving state via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., the game is in a high probability state), the game proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS80, if the game is in a high probability state, it is decided that the game will be a miss without time-saving, without carrying out the process of determining whether the time-saving has been missed in step 100IWS81 and thereafter.

If the probability of winning is not set (i.e., if the probability of winning is not in a probability of winning state), the CPU 103 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss is to be determined, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss is to be determined (step 100IWS81). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss is to be determined with a probability of approximately 1/400 (see FIG. 14-2). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving loss judgment table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss is to be determined with a probability of approximately 1/200 (see FIG. 14-3).

If it is decided that the time-saving miss is to occur (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 decides on the type of time-saving miss (time-saving miss A, time-saving miss B, or time-saving miss C) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and decides on the type of time-saving. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

In step 100IWS83, the time-saving type determination is performed using a type determination random number that is the same as the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65. Furthermore, if it is configured to determine small wins as well as small win types, it is sufficient to configure it so that the determination process is performed using a common type determination random number not only for the jackpot type determination and the time-saving type determination, but also for the small win type determination.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a normal jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a probability jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a sudden probability jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "4", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "6", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 14-14 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process. In the variable pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (i.e., the variable display is a rescue time reduction and a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the variable pattern table J for the rescue time reduction variable jackpot shown in FIG. 14-8 (J) as a table for determining the variable pattern (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table A for the jackpot shown in FIG. 14-7 (A) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (i.e., if it is a miss), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (i.e., if the display shows a change that results in a rescue time reduction and it is a miss), the CPU 103 selects the change pattern table I for the rescue time reduction change miss shown in FIG. 14-8 (I) as a table for determining the change pattern (step 100IWS1702B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 10 or less (i.e., if the number of changes remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 3 or less. In addition, the embodiment is not limited to the one shown in this example, and may be configured to check, for example, whether the value of the first pending memory count counter or the second pending memory count counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the combined reserved memory count counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table F for misses just before the rescue time reduction shown in FIG. 14-8 (F) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the combined reserved memory count counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table G for misses just before the rescue time reduction shown in FIG. 14-8 (G) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table H for misses during a high probability state shown in FIG. 14-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., if there are no reserved memories), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses during a normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B).

If the probability variable flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time-saving flag A is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 14-7(C), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss when in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 14-7(B).

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss), the CPU 103 selects the miss fluctuation pattern table D shown in FIG. 14-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the miss fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) for the normal state.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table E for deviations during the time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1714).

If the time-saving flag C is not set either (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 determines which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 14-7 and FIG. 14-8 should be used based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer (step 100IWS1716). In this example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. After the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern to which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among multiple fluctuation patterns.

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 100IWS1718), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Special pattern variation processing)
14-15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first controls the transmission of any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not to make it a jackpot, the decision result of the jackpot type, and the decision result of the time-saving type, if they have not been transmitted yet (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be missed (step 100IWS1124). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be missed can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be over, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit LED 100IW10 to start lighting up (step 100IWS1125). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

In this example, when the processing of step 100IWS1125 is executed and a time-saving missing pattern is derived and displayed, the right-hit LED 100IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 100IWS1128). The CPU 103 also controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "10 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 100IWS1130). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command or a second pattern determination B designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If it has not been decided that the time-saving feature should not be activated (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit LED 100IW10 to start turning on (step 100IWS1133). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

When the processing of step 100IWS1133 is executed, in this example, if the rescue time is shortened, the right-hit LED 100IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 100IWS1135). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the rescue time reduction determination flag is not set (N in step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" to the pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 100IWS1137). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command or a second pattern determination C designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
14-16 and 14-17 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 100IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, time-saving flag C, the probability change count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the probability change state, and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" in response to a jackpot, and if neither a next jackpot nor a time-saving miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles have been performed after the jackpot game ends, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "800" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "800" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 100IW10 to start lighting up (step 100IWS136). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening (fanfare time) until the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time-saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as described later, when the time-saving state is triggered by the rescue time-saving, the state is controlled to a time-saving state of 800 times (see steps 100IWS172, S173). In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS143, S144, when the time-saving state is triggered by the rescue time-saving, the rescue time-saving count counter is set to "800" after 800 variable displays are executed without a big hit or a time-saving miss. Then, if the next big hit or time-saving miss does not occur even after 800 variable displays are executed, the second rescue time-saving state is triggered and the state is controlled to a time-saving state. Note that in this example, a time-saving miss does not occur in the time-saving state triggered by the rescue time-saving, but a time-saving miss may occur and when it does occur, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter may be reset (i.e., set to "800").

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that have been set (any of the time-saving flags A to C) and ends the time-saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS150.

If the time-saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the special chance count counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the special chance count counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the special chance count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the special chance count counter (step 100IWS147) and checks whether the value of the special chance count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). If the value of the special chance count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the special chance flag and the time-saving flag A, and ends the special chance state (step 100IWS149). The process then proceeds to step 100IWS150.

Then, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 100IW10 to stop lighting (step 100IWS150). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153.

In this example, the process of steps 100IWS141 to S152 is executed to transition to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the end of the pattern determination period in the final time-saving or final high-variable fluctuation, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period in the final time-saving or final high-variable fluctuation.

In addition, in this example, the case where the special probability state ends and the time-saving state also ends at the final special probability state change is shown, but this is not limited to the case, and it may be configured so that only the special probability state ends and the time-saving state continues.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost (step 100IWS153). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided that the time-saving effect has been lost, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (step 100IWS154). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the normal state exists), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving effect counter to "100" (step 100IWS156) if the time-saving effect has been lost (Y in step 100IWS155). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss A is not met, but if the time-saving miss B is met (Y in step 100IWS157), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving counter to "50" (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not B (i.e., if the time-saving miss is C), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time-saving counter to 0 (step 100IWS161) if time-saving has been lost (Y in step 100IWS160). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not A, but B (Y in step 100IWS162), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving counter to "200" (step 100IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not B (i.e., if the time-saving miss is C), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "100" (step 100IWS164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

Next, if the time-saving flag A is set, the CPU 103 resets it (step 100IWS165). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag B and controls the game to the time-saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" when the time-saving miss occurs, and if neither the next jackpot nor the time-saving miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles are performed after the time-saving miss, the rescue time-saving state is entered and the game is controlled to the time-saving state.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

In this example, when the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168 is executed and a time-saving loss pattern is derived and displayed, the game is controlled to the time-saving state at the end of the pattern determination period, and a time-saving state B designation command is sent to switch to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state via the time-saving loss.

If it has not been decided that the time-saving feature should be removed (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-saving feature determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time-saving feature count counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the rescue time-saving feature count counter to "800" (step 100IWS172A). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving feature flag C and controls the game to the time-saving feature state (step 100IWS173). The CPU 103 also controls the game to send a time-saving feature state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In this example, the system is configured so that the time-saving state is controlled at the timing when the rescue time-saving occurs and the rescue time-saving count counter is set (set to "800"), allowing rescue time-saving to occur continuously, and once the rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state continues until a jackpot occurs, but this is not the only possible configuration. For example, the system may be configured so that when the rescue time-saving occurs, the system is simply controlled to the time-saving state without setting the rescue time-saving count counter, and then, when the 800 fluctuation display ends and the system is controlled to the normal state, the rescue time-saving count counter is set (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by one each time the variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "0", but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "0", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be added by one each time the variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "800".

In addition, in this example, the pattern determination period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, when the rescue time reduction is activated, to ensure a period for effects such as mode transition effects, but during the pattern determination period, the image display device 5 may be configured not to display decorative patterns, but to display only small patterns, so that the small patterns are not hidden by special effects or the like.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 100IWS172 is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until a rescue time-saving occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in step 100IWS172, the time-saving times counter may be set to a value greater than "800," or a value less than "800."

In addition, in step 100IWS172, the time-saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving times. For example, the time-saving counter may be configured to be set to "100" if a rescue time-saving is performed the first time, and to be set to "800" if a rescue time-saving is performed the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the time-saving times counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 10% probability, or 800 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIG. 14-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output from the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 14-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game. The jackpot 2 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game and during a time-saving state. The jackpot 3 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period when the time-saving state is lost. The jackpot 4 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period of a variable display that has become a rescue time-saving state. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal output at the start of a pattern determination period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time-saving state is entered at the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving state may also be entered when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, so when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is initiated at the end of the pattern determination period. Also, the time-saving state may also be entered when a rescue time-saving state occurs, so when a missing pattern for a variable display that results in a rescue time-saving state is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is initiated at the end of the pattern determination period.

The jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the pattern determination period but also during jackpot play. In addition, while this example shows a case where separate external output signals (jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal) are output when the time-saving feature is missed and when the time-saving feature is rescued, a shared external output signal may be output.

The jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal may also be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the pattern determination period.

For example, the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and the jackpot 3 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output, or the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and the jackpot 4 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

The jackpot 3 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed. The jackpot 4 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a time-saving state where the time-saving function has been rescued. If configured in this way, it will be possible to appropriately determine the type of time-saving function even during the time-saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 14-19 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and controls to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 100IWS534), and ends the process.

In step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag A and controls the time-saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot that is ending this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). Note that whether it is a normal jackpot or not can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "100" (step 100IWS539). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state A designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (i.e., if it is a chance jackpot or sudden chance jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the chance jackpot flag and controls the state to chance jackpot (step 100IWS541). The CPU 103 also sets the chance jackpot count counter to "100" (step 100IWS542). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a chance jackpot state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in the feature part 108IW will be described. FIG. 14-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature part 108IW. As shown in FIG. 14-20, in the normal state, if a sure-variant jackpot or a sudden sure-variant jackpot occurs, the state is controlled to a sure-variant state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and in the normal state, the state is controlled to a time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, even if a miss occurs in the normal state, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to a time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving state is reached (after the RAM clear process, or after a jackpot or a time-saving miss, if the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurring), the game will be controlled to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see step 100IWS173).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-20, if a special jackpot or sudden special jackpot occurs during the special jackpot state, the player is controlled back to the special jackpot state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the player is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). On the other hand, in the special jackpot state, the time-saving miss pattern is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and there is no rescue time-saving state. Also, in the special jackpot state, if 100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the player is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146-S149).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time-saving state A, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal win, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) again (see steps 100IWS537-S539). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if it is a miss, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, if 100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). On the other hand, there is no case where the time-saving state A becomes a rescue time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time-saving state B, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal win, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via a win) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). Also, even if there is a miss in the time-saving state B, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled again to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, if the variable display has ended 30, 50, 100, or 200 times without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). However, if the time-saving state A is missed during the time-saving state and the game is controlled to time-saving state B, time-saving state B will continue until the next big win occurs (see steps 100IWS160, S161). On the other hand, there is no case where the time-saving state B becomes a rescue time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time-saving state C, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal jackpot, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). On the other hand, in the time-saving state C, there is no case where a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Also, in the time-saving state C, if 800 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled again to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see steps 100IWS170-S173).

In this example, when a time-saving symbol that does not match the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed during time-saving state A, the state is uniformly switched to time-saving state B, but the control is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times may be compared with the number of time-saving times corresponding to the determined time-saving type, and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the current time-saving state A may be continued as is.

In this example, if a normal jackpot occurs during time-saving state B, the game will automatically transition to time-saving state A; however, this control is not limited to this. For example, the game may be configured to compare the current remaining number of time-saving times with the number of time-saving times corresponding to a normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game will continue in the current time-saving state B.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the time-saving miss symbol is not derived and displayed during time-saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79), but this is not the only possible configuration, and for example, it may be configured so that it is possible to determine that the time-saving miss is occurring even during time-saving state C.

In addition, in this example, when the probability variable state is entered, the probability variable state is ended based on the execution of 100 variable display cycles, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the probability variable state may be ended by a lottery process for each variable display, and the probability variable state may be ended based on the decision to end the probability variable state.

(Performance control main processing)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Fig. 14-21 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the performance control main process in the characteristic unit 108IW. In Fig. 14-21, the processes of steps S71 to S76 are the same as those shown in Fig. 6.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes small symbol process processing (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process processing of step 087IWS701, the image display device 5 executes a variable display of small symbols that are reduced versions of the left, center, and right decorative symbols, in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbols, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the image display device 5.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth pattern process (step 100IWS702). In this example, the fourth pattern process in step 100IWS702 is executed, and the fourth pattern is displayed in synchronization with the first and second special patterns, separately from the decorative pattern. In this example, when the first special pattern is displayed, the fourth pattern is displayed in the fourth pattern display 100IW21a provided to the left of the image display 5. When the second special pattern is displayed, the fourth pattern is displayed in the fourth pattern display 100IW21b provided to the right of the image display 5.

The process of step S77 is the same as that of step S77 shown in FIG. 6.

When the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed by alternately turning on and off two LEDs arranged above and below in the fourth pattern display 100IW21a, 21b.

In addition, when the variable time ends, the stopped pattern of the fourth pattern is displayed as a confirmed pattern at the start of the pattern confirmation period. In this case, if there is a jackpot, the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a jackpot pattern with red lights. In addition, if there is a time-saving miss, the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a time-saving miss pattern with blue lights. In addition, if there is a miss (no time-saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a miss pattern (no time-saving) with black lights.

The form of the stopping pattern of the fourth symbol is not limited to the form shown in this example, and may be configured to derive and display the stopping pattern of the fourth symbol in a form that allows distinction of the type of jackpot or time-saving type, for example.

In addition, in this example, a dedicated symbol is provided as the fourth symbol when the time-saving feature is lost, but this is not limited to the above, and the fourth symbol may be a common stopping symbol when the jackpot is hit and when the time-saving feature is lost.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Figures 14-22 to 14-23 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The performance control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, and in the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command received buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether a command is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception counter with the read pointer. If the two match, no received command is stored. If a received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the received command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading out the command, the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 100IWS613). The increment of +2 is because 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received performance control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, it sets a variation pattern command reception flag (step 100IWS616).

If the received performance control command is a display result designation command (step 100IWS617), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 100IWS618).

If the received performance control command is any of the pattern determination designation commands (first pattern determination A designation command, first pattern determination B designation command, first pattern determination C designation command, second pattern determination A designation command, second pattern determination B designation command, second pattern determination C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets the determination command reception flag according to the received pattern determination designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first pattern determination A designation command is received, the first determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination B designation command is received, the first determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination C designation command is received, the first determination C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination A designation command is received, the second determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination B designation command is received, the second determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second pattern confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received presentation control command is a jackpot start command (step 100IWS621), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received presentation control command is a jackpot end command (step 100IWS623), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions to be 1 (step 100IWS625), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received command to specify the number of rescue time reductions to be 1 in a command storage area for specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 1 formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS626).

If the received performance control command is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command in a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 100IWS628).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery (step 100IWS629), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display an initial result according to the number of times until the time for rescue based on the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue (step 100IWS630). For example, if the EXT data of the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 100 or less), the initial result is displayed as "112", indicating that the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 100 or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery is "02 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 101 or more and 200 or less), the initial result is displayed as "223", indicating that the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 101 or more and 200 or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction occurs is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial result is displayed as "889," indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction occurs is 701 or more and 800 or less.

In addition, this is not limited to the case where an initial result indicating the number of remaining changes is displayed when the power is restored. For example, in the first change display after the power is restored, a display indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached or a combination of symbols indicating the number of remaining changes may be displayed. Also, for example, within 1 to 100 changes after the power is restored, a display indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached or a combination of symbols indicating the number of remaining changes may be displayed so that a suggestive display is displayed at a relatively early stage after the power is restored. Also, it may be configured so that the initial result does not indicate the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the initial result may not indicate the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached).

If the received performance control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) (step 100IWS632).

If the received presentation control command is a command to specify time-saving state A (step 100IWS633), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (for example, a yellow background image corresponding to sunset mode) (step 100IWS634).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state B (step 100IWS635), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state B (a time-saving state after the time-saving state has ended) (for example, a green background image corresponding to forest mode) (step 100IWS636).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state C (step 100IWS637), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine orchard mode) (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even if the time-saving state is the same, different background images are displayed depending on whether the time-saving state is a jackpot state, a time-saving state is a miss state, or a time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state. With this configuration, the difference in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, and interest can be increased.

In addition, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and a common background image may be displayed regardless of whether the time-saving state is a jackpot, a time-saving state is a miss, or a rescue time-saving state. For example, a common background image may be displayed in steps 100IW634, 100IWS636, and 100IWS638, and a common background image may be displayed in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state is a miss, and the time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state.

If the received performance control command is a command to specify a special probability state (step 100IWS639), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image that corresponds to the special probability state (for example, a red background image that corresponds to the flame mode) (step 100IWS640).

If the received performance control command is a right-hit notification start command (step 100IWS641), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 to start lighting up (step 100IWS642). Note that in this example, the right-hit notification start command is sent at the start of the pattern determination period when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed or when a time-saving rescue is activated (see steps 100IWS1126, S1134), so the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 starts lighting up at the start of the pattern determination period.

If the received performance control command is a command to end the right-hit notification (step 100IWS643), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 to end its illumination (step 100IWS644).

If the received performance control command is any other command, the performance control CPU 120 executes processing to store the received performance control command and set a flag corresponding to the received performance control command (step 100IWS645). For example, if a command designating a large prize winning slot is received, the large prize winning slot flag is set to indicate that a prize has been won in the large prize slot. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demo performance control process)
14-24 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demo performance control process. As described above, in this example, when the reserved memory is not stored (i.e., the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the symbol determination period and the end of the big win game, the main board 11 transmits a customer waiting demo designation command to the performance control board 12.

When a customer waiting demo designation command is received, if 10 seconds have passed since the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands such as a performance control command at the time of the start winning (Y in step 105IWS250), the performance control CPU 120 executes the caption display execution lottery process (step 105IWS251).

In this example, during periods when no variable display is being performed, it is possible to display a caption indicating that the machine is equipped with a rescue time-saving function. In step 105IWS251, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to display a caption.

Figure 14-25 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a caption display execution lottery table and a caption mode determination lottery table. Of Figure 14-25, Figure 14-25 (A) is a caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1," and Figure 14-25 (B) is a caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "6."

As shown in Figures 14-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the rate at which captions are displayed while waiting for customers varies depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. With this configuration, the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction can be indicated by the presence or absence of captions displayed while waiting for customers.

In addition, as shown in Figs. 14-25(A) and (B), in this example, the setting value is configured to change the rate at which captions are displayed while customers are waiting. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the setting value is favorable based on whether or not captions are displayed while customers are waiting.

Note that in FIG. 14-25, examples of setting value 1 and setting value 6 are shown for the sake of simplicity, but a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a table corresponding to multiple setting values (e.g., setting values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is decided to display the telop (Y in step 105IWS252), the performance control CPU 120 executes a lottery process to determine the telop display mode (step 105IWS253). Then, the telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, it is possible to display the telop in a red presentation mode and a blue presentation mode. In step 105IWS253, the presentation mode for displaying the telop is determined by lottery.

Figure 14-25 (C) is a caption mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1," and Figure 14-25 (D) is a caption mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "6."

As shown in Fig. 14-25 (C) and (D), in this example, the presentation of the telop displayed while waiting for customers is configured to differ depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. With this configuration, the presentation of the telop displayed while waiting for customers can indicate the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 14-25 (C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the presentation style of the telop display displayed while customers are waiting varies depending on the setting value. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the setting value is set to an advantageous value depending on the presentation style of the telop display while customers are waiting.

Then, if three minutes have passed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands, such as a performance control command at the time of the initial winning (Y in step 105IWS255), the performance control CPU 120 will play a demonstration movie (step 105IWS256).

Note that the display of subtitles while customers are waiting and the playback of demonstration movies will end when a performance control command is received at the time of the start of the winning.

Figure 14-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode for displaying subtitles. In the example shown in Figure 14-26, the screen transitions in the order of (A) (B) (C) or (A) (D) (E).

As shown in FIG. 14-26 (A), if the reserved memory is not stored when the pattern determination period has elapsed, a customer waiting demo designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Then, after the performance control board 12 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, if 10 seconds pass without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of the initial winning, and it is decided to display a caption while waiting for customers, a caption is displayed on the image display device 5 indicating that the machine is equipped with a rescue time-saving function.

At this time, if it is decided to display the caption display in blue presentation mode, caption display 108IW001 with a blue border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 14-26(B) the border is white). Also, if it is decided to display the caption display in red presentation mode, caption display 108IW002 with a red border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 14-26(D) the border is filled in black).

Then, when three minutes have passed since the performance control board 12 received the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands, such as the performance control command at the time of the initial winning, the image display device 5 starts playing a demonstration movie. Note that, as shown in Figures 14-26 (C) and (E), the subtitle display continues to be displayed even while the demonstration movie is being played.

(Preview notice setting process)
FIG. 14-27 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the performance control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101) in the special symbol process, the occurrence of a start winning is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process is executed to predict the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. Then, after the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the pre-reading judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

In the pre-reading preview setting process (step S161), for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-reading preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-27, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether it has received a presentation control command at the time of the start winning (for example, a presentation control command for specifying the judgment results such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the look-ahead judgment) (step 108 IWS 701).

When a presentation control command for a start winning has been received, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the number of reserved memories, including the reserved memory for which a presentation control command for a start winning has been newly received, is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction (step 108IWS702). In other words, it judges whether the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed after the rescue time reduction has begun. Then, if the number of reserved memories is not greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed after the rescue time reduction has begun, the advance notice setting process is terminated.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 108IWS702, it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance that predicts the variable display at the time of the rescue time reduction among the variable displays corresponding to the pending memory stored before the rescue time reduction, while restricting the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that predicts the variable display after the variable display at the time of the rescue time reduction. In other words, it is configured to restrict the execution of a look-ahead preview performance across the rescue time reduction where the game status changes. This configuration makes it possible to avoid complication of the control processing and also to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation content.

If the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, i.e., if the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed before the rescue time reduction, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance, and if so, the type and mode of performance (step 108 IWS 703).

Figure 14-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading preview performance execution decision table, a pre-reading preview performance type decision table, and a pre-reading preview performance mode decision table. In step 108IWS703, the tables shown in Figure 14-28 are used to decide whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance, and if so, what type and mode of performance to use.

Specifically, when the game state is a state other than time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance execution decision table shown in FIG. 14-28 (A) is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, and when the game state is time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance execution decision table shown in FIG. 14-28 (B) is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance.

As shown in Figures 14-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the look-ahead preview performance can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the look-ahead preview performance is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this configuration, as shown in Fig. 14-28 (A) and (B), the time-saving state C is configured to execute the pre-reading preview performance less frequently when the display result is a miss than in game states other than the time-saving state C. With this configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (i.e., when no jackpot has been generated for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest when the pre-reading preview performance is executed but does not result in a jackpot.

In step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, if the gaming state is a state other than time-saving state C, the type of performance of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 14-28(C), and if the gaming state is time-saving state C, the type of performance of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 14-28(D). Specifically, the performance type is decided to be either a chance eye performance or a hold change performance.

The chance eye effect is an effect that suggests that the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading preview effect will be a jackpot by displaying a chance eye (in this example, "778") as the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading preview effect. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect is executed that teases whether or not the display result will be a chance eye (in this example, "778"). Also, for example, when the chance eye effect is executed in a red performance mode, a red chance eye (in this example, "778") is displayed as a stopped display, and when the chance eye effect is executed in a blue performance mode, a blue chance eye (in this example, "778") is displayed as a stopped display.

The hold change effect is an effect in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, suggesting that the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview effect will be a jackpot. Also, for example, if the hold change effect is executed in a red presentation mode, a red hold display is displayed, and if the hold change effect is executed in a blue presentation mode, a blue hold display is displayed.

Figure 14-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of each type of preview effect. Among Figures 14-29, Figures 14-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of chance eye effects, and Figures 14-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of reserve change effects.

When the chance eye effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, after the one variable display is started as shown in FIG. 14-29 (A1), the left and right decorative symbols are displayed as stopped as shown in FIG. 14-29 (B1) and (C1). Then, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (D1), an effect is executed to suggest whether the central decorative symbol will stop as a "7" that becomes the chance eye "778" or a "6" that does not become the chance eye "778". After that, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (E1), when the central decorative symbol stops as a "7" and the chance eye "778" is displayed, it is suggested that there may be a reserved memory in the reserved memory that corresponds to the variable display that becomes a jackpot. Note that after the provocative effect is executed, a symbol other than the chance eye "778" (for example, "768") may be displayed as stopped.

When a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in Figures 14-29 (A2) and (B2), when a start winning occurs, a new hold display is displayed in a display mode (e.g., red) different from the normal mode, suggesting the possibility that a variable display resulting in a jackpot will be executed based on the hold memory corresponding to that hold display. In this example, the display mode of the hold display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Note that the hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in Figure 14-29, and may instead be such that a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and then changes to a display mode different from the normal mode at any time before the corresponding hold display and active display end.

Figure 14-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue. Of Figure 14-30, Figure 14-30(A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a jackpot, and Figure 14-30(B) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a rescue. In the examples shown in Figures 14-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that the start winning occurs at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 14-30(A), when a chance eye effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, an effect is executed to tease whether or not the chance eye pattern will stop in the variable display executed from the time the start winning occurs until the variable display of the look-ahead target starts, and then the chance eye pattern is displayed stationary. Because such teasing effects are included, when executing a chance eye effect, it is necessary to ensure a predetermined execution period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-30(A), when a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the display mode of the hold display (or active display) changes at the timing when the start winning occurs, or at any timing across multiple change displays from the time when the start winning occurs until the change display of the look-ahead target ends. The display of the hold display and active display in the changed display mode is then continued until the change display of the look-ahead target ends. In other words, when a hold change effect is executed, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning occurs until the change display of the look-ahead target ends, and can further continue until the change display of the look-ahead target ends.

In this way, even in the pre-reading preview performance, the chance eye performance and the hold change performance have different execution periods. In other words, the chance eye performance is executed for a specified period (e.g., 2 seconds) during one variable display, whereas the hold change performance is executed over multiple variable displays.

As mentioned above, in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the ultra-shortened variation (1.5 seconds) is not executed when a miss occurs, and the shortened variation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but in the time-saving state via a rescue, the ultra-shortened variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly executed when a miss occurs. Therefore, as shown in Figure 14-30, in the time-saving state via a rescue, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance eye effect.

In this example, as shown in Figures 14-28 (C) and (D), in the time-saving state via a jackpot, both the chance eye effect and the reserve change effect can be executed as the look-ahead preview effect, while in the time-saving state via a rescue, the chance eye effect is restricted from being executed as the look-ahead preview effect, and only the reserve change effect can be executed. With this configuration, the look-ahead preview effect can be executed appropriately according to the game state.

In addition, in step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, if the gaming state is a state other than time-saving state C, the performance mode of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance mode decision table shown in FIG. 14-28 (E), and if the gaming state is time-saving state C, the performance type of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 14-28 (D). Specifically, it is decided to be either a red performance mode or a blue performance mode.

As shown in Figures 14-28 (E) and (F), in this example, the look-ahead preview performance can be executed using the red performance mode and the blue performance mode, and is configured so that the probability of executing the look-ahead preview performance using the red performance mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance using the red performance mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, as shown in Fig. 14-28 (E) and (F), when in time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance is executed only in the red performance mode. With this configuration, when in time-saving state C (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the pre-reading preview performance is executed in the blue performance mode, which has a low jackpot expectation. In this example, when in time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance is executed only in the red performance mode, but when there is a miss, there is a 99% chance that the pre-reading preview performance is not executed. Therefore, it is configured to prevent frequent cases where the pre-reading preview performance is executed in the red performance mode but the display result is a miss.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in Figure 14-28, the execution ratio of the pre-reading preview performance, the ratio of performance types and performance modes can be made different between when the time-saving state C is in effect (i.e. when no jackpots have occurred for a long period of time) and when the time-saving state C is not in effect, thereby increasing interest.

In this example, as described below, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the execution of the preview performance is restricted (only preview performances with high expectations may not be executed), but the execution of the look-ahead preview performance may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the look-ahead preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the look-ahead preview performance of a type with high expectations may be reduced (or not executed).

In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 14-28, for example, even in time-saving state C, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving miss, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance may not be restricted.

When the processing of step 108IWS704 is completed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of the pre-read preview performance based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, if it is determined that a chance eye performance is to be executed, in step 108IWS704, the chance eye flag is set as the execution setting for the chance eye performance. Then, in steps 108IWS809-S810 of the variable display start setting process described below, if the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye performance is executed by selecting a process table that includes the chance eye performance. The chance eye flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display that is the subject of the pre-reading is executed.

Also, for example, if it is decided to execute a hold change presentation, in step 108 IWS704, the hold change presentation is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of the start winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 14-31 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 100IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 100IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 100IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "normal jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same even numbers as the stopping symbols (normal jackpot pattern). If the received display result designation command indicates a "probable jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same odd numbers as the stopping symbols (probable jackpot pattern). If the received display result designation command indicates a "sudden probable jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbols (sudden probable jackpot pattern).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols with two matching symbols on the left and right is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the missing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving effect. Also, if a setting is made to execute a chance eye effect, a combination of decorative symbols of the chance eye symbol (in this example, "778") is determined.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of the same patterns on the left, center, and right) are called jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a chance jackpot (a combination of the same odd-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called chance jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a normal jackpot (non-chances jackpot) (a combination of the same even-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called non-chances jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a miss are called miss patterns.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

Figure 14-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table. In step 108IWS802A, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction exceeds 10 times, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 14-32 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance, and if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 times or less, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 14-32 (B) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance. Also, when it is decided to execute the preview performance, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction exceeds 10 times, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 14-32 (C) is used to decide the performance mode of the preview performance, and if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 14-32 (D) is used to decide the performance mode.

As shown in Figures 14-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the preview effect can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the preview effect is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 14-32(A) and (B), in this configuration, the rate at which the preview effect is executed is lower in a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). This configuration makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed but does not result in a jackpot during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less and the countdown effect and effect effects described below are executed).

In addition, during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time reduction), the countdown effect and effect effects described below are executed, but by restricting the execution of the timer effect as a preview effect at this time, it is possible to avoid multiple numbers indicating the counter being displayed, and to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in Figures 14-32 (C) and (D), in this example, the preview effect can be executed in a red presentation mode (e.g., a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (e.g., a blue presentation image is displayed), and is configured so that the probability of the preview effect being executed in the red presentation mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect in the red presentation mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-32(C) and (D), in this configuration, the rate at which the preview performance is executed in red presentation mode when the display result is a miss is lower in a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed in red presentation mode during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot.

In addition, if the device is configured to be able to execute multiple types of preview effects with different jackpot expectations, execution may be restricted only for preview effects of a type with a high jackpot expectation (for example, if jackpot expectation is classified into five stages, preview effects of a type with a jackpot expectation of the fourth stage or higher) during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer times remaining until the rescue time reduction).

In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 14-32, for example, even if the number of remaining plays until the rescue time-saving feature is 10 or less, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving feature failure, the execution of the preview performance may not be restricted.

As mentioned above, in this example, in the case of time-saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is restricted, but the execution of the preview performance may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the preview performance type with high expectation may be reduced (or not executed).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 (step 100IWS803). Note that whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 can be determined, for example, by checking whether a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 100IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100), a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 800), a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 0 (step 108IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 0 can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 0.

When the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot or not (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, the time-saving entry presentation can clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state, thereby increasing the player's interest when the rescue time reduction is reached.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry pseudo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot has been reached after executing a presentation of a common type to the time-saving entry presentation (step 100IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after first recognizing that the number of remaining changes until the time-saving rescue period is reached is 0, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In this example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached, a special time-saving feature change pattern for a jackpot is used to create a time-saving effect, but this is not the only option. For example, a full rotation effect (in other words, a jackpot is confirmed) in which the three decorative symbols change while remaining aligned can be executed, which is not executed unless the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and to increase interest.

In addition, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the rescue time-saving fluctuations is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used.

In this example, if the display result is a miss when the number of times the time-saving time is reached, a dedicated pattern for the miss of the time-saving time is used, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a pattern for a miss similar to that of normal time-saving time may be used, or a pattern for specifying a reach performance with a short time may be used. By configuring in this way, the pattern can be made common before and after the number of times the time-saving time is reached, and data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the pattern determination period has elapsed, the time-saving state C is entered, and the image display device 5 is switched to a background image (in this example, an orange background image) corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via the time-saving time-saving) (see step 078IWS638), so that the change in the background image can notify that the time-saving state is being controlled by the time-saving time-saving state.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is not 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less (step 108IWS807). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 108IWS808). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10), a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the count number "10" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 1), a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the count number "1" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

In this example, when the number of remaining changes until a rescue change occurs is 10 or less, a countdown effect and an effect are executed. This configuration makes it possible to make the player look forward to a rescue change, increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by quitting the game just before a rescue change occurs.

In this example, the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and a teasing effect or a countdown effect is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when a background designation command that designates a background image is transmitted, the EXT data of the background designation command may be set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs and transmitted. The performance control CPU 120 may then determine the remaining number of changes based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute a teasing effect or a countdown effect.

In this example, when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are always executed, but it may be determined by lottery whether they are executed or not. Also, for example, when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is not 10 or less, it may be determined by lottery whether a so-called fake countdown effect and effect effect (for example, executed in a manner common to the countdown effect and the effect effect, but is interrupted midway without continuing until the count number "0" is reached. See FIG. 14-42) is executed or not. In this case, it may be configured so that the rate at which the countdown effect and the effect effect (including real and fake) are executed is higher when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is 10 or less than when it is not 10 or less. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a rescue change and increase the interest. It is also possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player due to the player ending the game just before the rescue change.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 10 or less (N in step 108IWS807), the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the chance eye presentation has been set to be executed (step 108IWS809), and if the chance eye presentation has been set to be executed, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including the chance eye presentation (including a presentation that suggests whether or not a chance eye will be generated) (step 108IWS810). Note that if the chance eye presentation has not been set to be executed, it may be possible to determine by lottery whether or not to execute a presentation in which the chance eye pattern is not displayed after the presentation that suggests whether or not a chance eye will be generated (a so-called false chance eye presentation).

If the chance eye effect is not set to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 12. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 108IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display performance processing)
14-33 and 14-34 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 100IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 100IWS847). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, it proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time-saving function has missed during normal operation and cases where the time-saving function has rescued. In step 100IWS847, if the time-saving function has missed during normal operation, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for time-saving function misses and the right-hit notification is selected, and if the time-saving function has rescued, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for rescue time-saving function and the right-hit notification is selected. Whether the time-saving function has rescued and the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the EXT data of the received rescue time-saving count 1 designation command is "00 (H)".

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 100IWS851). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the continuation performance (performance that notifies the user that the time-saving state will continue) (step 100IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS854). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, it proceeds to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first pattern confirmation B designation command nor the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received (step 100IWS856). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation C command reception flag or the second confirmation C command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first pattern determination C designation command nor the second pattern determination C designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command is received (Y in step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 100IWS857), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 100IWS858). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS860). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to the determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS861). Then proceed to step 100IWS862.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process proceeds to step 100IWS858 and onwards and the pattern determination period begins. However, normally, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 100IWS857 will be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 100IWS858 and onwards.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Waiting for special drawing)
FIG. 14-35 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for the special drawing hit (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the waiting process for the special drawing hit, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed performance period timer (step 100IWS871), and checks whether the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (step 100IWS872). If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS873), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n) (step 100IWS874).

When the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). The performance control CPU 120 also sets the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the decorative symbol stopping pattern is currently being displayed (step 100IWS878). If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is currently being displayed, the process ends. If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is not currently being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the determined stopping pattern (missing pattern (no time reduction), time reduction missing pattern, or jackpot pattern) (step 100IWS879).

If the jackpot pattern is displayed as stopped in step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed presentation period timer after subtraction has timed out (i.e., the pattern fixed period has elapsed), the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 100IWS883). Whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table according to the mode transition performance (performance that notifies the player of a transition to a probability change state (probability change mode) or a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the performance during the jackpot, including a right-hit notification (step 100IWS885). Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS887).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (i.e., if a losing symbol (no time reduction) or a time-reduction losing symbol is stopped and displayed), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 100IWS889).

(Performance execution timing)
Next, the timing of the effect when the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction is executed will be described. FIG. 14-36 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of the effect when the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction is executed. As shown in FIG. 14-36, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern is ended, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display (see steps 100IWS74, S75), the time reduction entry effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special pattern (see step 108IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the losing symbol (without time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing symbol (without time reduction) is displayed as a confirmed one for a symbol determination period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Also, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 14-36, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 14-36, a right-hit notification is started in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when the symbol determination period has elapsed, the time reduction state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 14-36, the background image (in this example, an orange display color background image) corresponding to the time reduction state C (a time reduction state via a rescue time reduction) is switched to in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS638). With this configuration, a period of time can be secured for notifying the player that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) will begin in the normal state, thereby clarifying the presentation when switching game states and increasing interest.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving, will be described. Figures 14-37 to 14-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Figures 14-37 to 14-40, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 14-37(A), the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction is displayed every 100 spins when the symbols stop. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when there are 800 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols "134") is derived and displayed. At this time, the remaining spin number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left, saying "800 spins left until rescue time reduction begins!". At this time, an explanation of the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 100IW103. With this configuration, the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine equipped with the rescue time reduction can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-37(B), for example, when there are 700 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the symbol combination "423") is derived and displayed. At this time, as in FIG. 14-37(A), the remaining spins display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, stating "700 spins left until rescue time-saving mode begins!". Also, at this time, an explanation of the rescue time-saving mode (for example, an explanation of the rescue time-saving function and the effects of the rescue time-saving mode) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 100IW103.

In this example, as shown in Figures 14-37 (A) and (B), a teasing effect suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is performed every 100 changes, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the teasing effect may be configured not to be performed when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is between 400 and 800, but to be performed when the number of remaining changes is 300 or less (i.e., the remaining number of changes is 300, 200, or 100).

In addition, instead of necessarily executing the teasing effect when the number of remaining fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 2 is received, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed, and if it is decided to execute the teasing effect, the teasing effect is executed in the manner shown in Figures 14-37 (A) and (B). In this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the teasing effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases.

As shown in Figures 14-37(C) to 14-38(E), when there are 10 spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a countdown display 100IW104A is displayed in the center of the screen according to the number of remaining spins. For example, the countdown display 100IW104A shows a countdown from "10" to "1" each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop. Each figure shows an example of a losing pattern (in this example, a combination of the patterns "653", "844", and "123") being derived and displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-37(C) to 14-38(E), when there are 10 or more spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range that corresponds to the number of remaining spins. In this example, as the number of remaining spins decreases (i.e., as the rescue time-saving mode approaches), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (E), when there is one spin left until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode occurs, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a varying manner, and the patterns stop and a losing pattern (in this example, the pattern combination "123") is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-38(F), when there are 0 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode and the display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 changes (i.e., the display of the changes that will result in the rescue time-saving mode) starts, a time-saving entry effect is started to notify the player that the reel will be controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode), as shown in FIG. 14-38(G), and the time-saving entry effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. This configuration makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the reel will be controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode), and it is possible to increase the player's interest when the reel is controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-38(G), when the time-saving entry performance starts, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-38(H), when the symbols stop, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol combination "254") is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving entry performance, notifications that are generally made during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning to not forget to remove the prepaid card or a warning to prevent addiction, may be made, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, when making notifications during the time-saving entry performance, the notifications may be made in the same manner as when making notifications during the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. Furthermore, these notifications may not be made during the time-saving entry performance, but may be made during the ending period of the first big win after transitioning to the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-39(I), when the pattern determination period begins, the mode effect start display 100IW105 "Super Hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect begins. Note that from then on, even during the mode transition effect, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-39(J), when the mode transition presentation starts, an operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 14-1). For example, the operation suggestion image 100IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the pressing of the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 14-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the text display 100IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, notifying the player that the rescue time reduction will begin. In addition, the right-hit instruction display 100IW108, which instructs the player to hit to the right, is displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text display "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 14-39 (K). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a presentation (so-called reserved consecutive presentation) in the same manner as in FIG. 14-39 (K) based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive presentation is executed by displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 14-8 (E)). Therefore, the fluctuation display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the fluctuation display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 14-39 (K) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 14-39 (K) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

The example shows a case where the right hit instruction display 100IW108 starts to be displayed from the timing of the display of the text display 100IW107 "V STOCK x 1", but the timing of the start of the display of the right hit instruction display 100IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the right hit instruction display 100IW108 may start to be displayed from the timing of the confirmation display of the stop pattern shown in FIG. 14-38 (H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-39 (L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode for the rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-40 (M), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 is displayed to notify that the rescue time reduction will start. For example, the words "Rescue time reduction started" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation starts, the game transitions to time reduction state C, and the rescue time reduction starts.

Next, we will explain the presentation style of the time-saving effect. Figure 14-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation style of the time-saving effect. The example shown in Figure 14-41 is carried out following the examples in Figures 14-37 (A) to (D).

As shown in FIG. 14-41 (E), when there is one spin remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode occurs, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a varying manner, and then the patterns stop and a losing pattern (in this example, the pattern combination "123") is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (F'), there are 0 spins remaining until the transition to rescue time-saving mode, and the display of decorative pattern 100IW100 and small pattern 100IW101 begins to change. Note that although this change indicates that rescue time-saving mode has been established, the display result is a jackpot. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, the game will transition to a jackpot game without transitioning to a time-saving mode due to rescue time-saving mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-41(G'), the time-saving entry appearance effect starts, and the time-saving entry appearance display 100IW104C in the same manner as the time-saving entry appearance effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that, as shown in FIG. 14-41(G'), when the time-saving entry appearance effect starts, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed, just as when the time-saving entry appearance effect starts.

As shown in FIG. 14-41(H), when the display of the time-saving entry performance display 100IW104C ends, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbols stop, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (the symbol combination of "254" in this example) is derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stops, and the jackpot symbol (the symbol combination of "777" in this example) is derived and displayed. Then, the game moves to the jackpot game. With this configuration, the player is notified of the jackpot after first recognizing that the time-saving rescue has been established, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases interest.

When the configuration of this feature unit 108IW is applied to a gaming machine that is also configured to execute a special feature game in which control is made to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the special feature during a small win game, when the display result of the variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature is a small win, a time-saving entry appearance effect may be executed to notify the player that a small win has occurred.

Next, we will explain the presentation aspects of so-called fake countdown presentations and effect presentations. Figure 14-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of the presentation aspects of so-called fake countdown presentations and effect presentations.

As shown in Figures 14-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a so-called false countdown effect is executed, and a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the number of remaining spins being 10 is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop, a countdown from "10" is displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a so-called false effect is executed, and the effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range corresponding to the number of remaining spins being 10. Then, each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop, the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-42(E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are terminated before the remaining number of spins until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode is displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where there is only one spin remaining. At this time, since the remaining number of spins until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode is not 0, the time-saving entry effect is not executed.

When the so-called fake countdown and effect effects shown in FIG. 14-42 can be configured to be executable, it is also possible to prevent the execution of teasing effects that suggest the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (A) and (B). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish whether the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is real or fake when it is displayed.

In this example, when the pattern stops, the remaining number of spins until the rescue time-saving feature and the explanation of the effects during the rescue time-saving feature and a countdown are displayed, but this may also be done when the pattern starts to change or while it is changing.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time-saving counter is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time-saving function is not activated, but for example, when a story-based effect (such as a story reach effect or a story about whether to perform high-speed fluctuation) is to be executed, the selection buffer and story counter for that story may also be cleared. Also, it may be possible to configure the game so that a story can be set when the rescue time-saving function is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

(Variation 1)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, the pattern determination period in the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than the usual 0.5 seconds, and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed during the pattern determination period, but the processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the pattern determination period may be set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a delay period until the next variation is started is set, and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed during the delay period. Below, a modified example 1 in which a delay period until the next variation is started is set and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed is described.

Figure 14-43 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in variant 1. As shown in Figure 14-43, in variant 1, the special symbol process processing includes the next change postponement processing (step 100IWS114) in addition to the processing shown in Figure 5. Note that in variant 1, the start winning determination processing (step 100IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the start winning determination processing (step 101) shown in Figure 5.

In variant 1, the normal special pattern processing (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0". Also, the variable pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "1". Also, the special pattern variable processing (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". Also, the special pattern stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3".

In addition, the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4".

The pre-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". The during-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". The post-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". The end of the jackpot process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8".

In addition, the small win pre-opening process (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". In addition, the small win opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". In addition, the small win end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "11".

In the first modified example, the normal special symbol processing (step 100IWS110) and the variable pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) are the same as the normal special symbol processing (step S110) and the variable pattern setting processing (step S111) shown in FIG. 5. In addition, in the first modified example, the special symbol changing processing (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stopping processing (step 100IWS113) are different from the special symbol changing processing (step S112) and the special symbol stopping processing (step S113) shown in FIG. 5 in that the symbol determination period is set to 0.5 seconds, the same as normal, even if the rescue time reduction occurs, and a first symbol determination C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command is sent.

In addition, in the first modified example, the process before the big win opening (step 100IWS115) to the process after the small win ending (step 100IWS121) is the same as the process before the big win opening (step S114) to the process after the small win ending (step S120) shown in FIG. 5.

Figure 14-44 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in the modified example 1. In the modified example 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 14-16 and 14-17. In the modified example 1, when the rescue time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets a value equivalent to a predetermined postponement period (20 seconds in this example) to a postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement processing (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The processing of step 100IWS175 is the same as the processing shown in Figure 14-17.

Figure 14-45 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in variant example 1. In the next change postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and checks whether the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the delay period measurement timer after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the rescue time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls the time-saving state (step 100IWS194). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In addition, in variant example 1, the next change postponement process transitions to the time-saving state when the postponement period until the start of the next change (20 seconds in this example) has elapsed, but this is not limited to this form. For example, the next change postponement process may be configured to issue a right-hit notification and transition to the time-saving state at the start of the postponement period until the start of the next change or during the postponement period. In other words, the next change postponement process may be configured to control to the time-saving state and issue a right-hit notification, or it may be configured to only issue a right-hit notification without controlling to the time-saving state, and various forms are possible.

In addition, in variant example 1, a uniform 20-second postponement period is measured in the next change postponement process, but this is not limited to this. For example, if a rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing of the rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur continuously, different postponement periods may be set for rescue time reductions in the normal state and rescue time reductions in the time reduction state. For example, when rescue time reduction occurs during the time reduction state, a shorter postponement period may be set and measured in the next change postponement process compared to rescue time reductions in the normal state, and the postponement period may be shortened for the second or subsequent rescue time reductions.

In addition, while the next change postponement process is being executed, the image display device 5 may be configured not to display decorative patterns, but to display only small patterns, so that the small patterns are not hidden by props or the like.

Moreover, in variant example 1, a case was shown in which the next change postponement process is executed to extend the period until the start of the next change when the time reduction is rescued, but this is not limited to such a case, and it may also be applied to the display of a change that is not in the time reduction state, and the next change postponement process similar to variant example 1 may be executed to extend the period until the start of the next change.

Furthermore, as described above, when applied to the variable display when the time-saving function is not activated, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 14-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next variable postponement processing. If configured in this way, the pattern determination period of the variable display when the time-saving function is not activated can be made the same as the normal variable display at 0.5 seconds, and processing related to right-hit notifications, etc. can be executed in the same process as in the case of rescue time-saving functions, etc.

Figure 14-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in modified example 1. As shown in Figure 14-46, in modified example 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special pattern and decorative pattern ends, and when a losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed stationary, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time reduction occurs (see steps 100IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special pattern (see step 108IWS806B). Then, when the display of the special pattern is finished and the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for the same 0.5 second pattern determination period as usual (see step 078 IWS1135). Next, when the 0.5 second pattern determination period ends, as shown in FIG. 14-46, the mode transition is performed in the image display device 5 for 20 seconds (see step 100 IWS114). Then, during the next change postponement period, as shown in FIG. 14-46, a mode transition performance is executed in the image display device 5. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the next change postponement period, as shown in FIG. 14-46, a right-hit notification is started in the image display device 5. Next, when the next change postponement period has passed, the time reduction state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 14-46, the background image (in this example, an orange display color background image) corresponding to the time reduction state C (time reduction state via rescue time reduction) is switched to in the image display device 5.

When configured as in variant 1, a change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and after the pattern determination period has elapsed, a jackpot 4 signal may be output at the start of the next change postponement process (i.e., the start of the next change postponement period). The jackpot 4 signal here is a signal that is output to the outside during the next change postponement period after the pattern determination period of the change display that has become the rescue time shortening. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

In addition, when configured as in variant example 1, a test signal or external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which it is expected that he or she will perform a right hit may be output at the start of the next change postponement process (i.e., at the start of the next change postponement period), or a right hit notification may be initiated. With this configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to a right hit or to notify a right hit at the appropriate time.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, during the time-saving state controlled based on the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 14-8 (E)) is uniformly selected to display the fluctuation of 1.5 seconds at high speed, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Below, modified examples 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving is different will be described. FIG. 14-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples 2 to 4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving, modified example 8-37.

First, a method of selecting a variation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving in the modified example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 14-47(A). In the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, regardless of whether 800 variation displays are executed after the RAM clear process (without a jackpot or a time-saving miss) or 800 variation displays are executed after a jackpot or a time-saving miss (without the next jackpot or a time-saving miss), the variation pattern tables F and G (see FIG. 14-8(F) and (G)) are uniformly selected 10 variations before the rescue time-saving, and a 5-second or 12-second variation display is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and the effect effect, and after the rescue time-saving is entered and the time-saving state is controlled, the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 14-8(E)) is uniformly selected to execute a 1.5-second high-speed variation display, but this is not limited to such an embodiment.

For example, as shown in variant example 2 of FIG. 14-47, in the case where 800 fluctuation displays are performed after the RAM clear process and a rescue time reduction is achieved, even if it is between 10 fluctuations and 1 fluctuation before the rescue time reduction, fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 14-7(B)) is selected to perform the same fluctuation display as normal, and after the time reduction state is controlled based on the rescue time reduction, fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 14-7(C)) is selected to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when a jackpot is reached, and a 5-second fluctuation display may be performed at a high rate.

For example, as shown in modified example 3 of FIG. 14-47, in the case where 800 variable displays are performed after a jackpot is hit and a rescue time-saving period is reached, a variable pattern for rescue time-saving period misses (for example, variable pattern PA3-1) is selected from variable pattern table I (see FIG. 14-8 (I)) when the 800th variable display is performed, and a variable display with a variable time of 25 seconds is performed. Note that, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, the time-saving period entry effect is performed during the variable display, and the mode transition effect and right-hit notification are performed during the pattern determination period, but it may be configured to perform, for example, a mode transition effect and right-hit notification during the 25-second variable display (therefore, in this case, the pattern determination period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in variants 2 and 3 of FIG. 14-47, the presentation can be made different by varying the selection rate of the change pattern in the change display that results in rescue time reduction between when rescue time reduction occurs after RAM clear processing and when rescue time reduction occurs after a jackpot, and the presentation can be made different by varying the selection rate of the change pattern in the change display after transitioning to a time-saving state via rescue time reduction.

Also, for example, as shown in variant example 4 of Figure 14-47, it is possible to select fluctuation pattern table B (see Figure 14-7 (B)) and display the same fluctuation as normal even if it is 10 fluctuations or 1 fluctuation before the rescue time reduction, select fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 14-7 (C)) during the time reduction state based on the first rescue time reduction to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when a jackpot is reached and display a 5-second fluctuation at a high rate, and select fluctuation pattern table E (see Figure 14-8 (E)) and display a 1.5-second high-speed fluctuation fluctuation.
Example 2

Next, the gaming machine according to Example 2 in the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 14-48 to 14-54. Note that, regarding Example 2, the differences from Example 1 will be mainly described.

In Example 2, in principle, the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs or the approaching rescue time reduction are not indicated. Therefore, in Example 2, a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the rescue time reduction is not provided, unlike the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 14-8 (F) in Example 1 or the fluctuation pattern table G shown in FIG. 14-8 (G) in Example 1. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 14-8 (F) and (G) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern only immediately before the rescue time reduction, the player may realize that the rescue time reduction is about to occur due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern, but by not using such a fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing.

In addition, in Example 2, a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that is also used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction is used for the variation display that results in rescue time reduction, rather than a dedicated variation pattern for rescue time reduction. Therefore, in Example 2, a variation pattern table for variations when rescue time reduction occurs, such as variation pattern table I shown in FIG. 14-8 (I) in Example 1 or variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 14-8 (J) is not provided. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the variation pattern when rescue time reduction occurs and before rescue time reduction occurs, and the data volume can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 14-48 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table A for the jackpot shown in FIG. 14-7 (A) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (i.e., if it is a miss), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if it is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table H for misses during a high probability state shown in FIG. 14-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., if there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses during a normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B).

If the probability variable flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time-saving flag A is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 14-7(C), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss when in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 14-7(B).

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss), the CPU 103 selects the miss fluctuation pattern table D shown in FIG. 14-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the miss fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) for the normal state.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table E for deviations during the time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1714).

If the time-saving flag C is not set either (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 determines which of the variation patterns shown in Figures 14-7 and 14-8 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special pattern determination buffer (step 100IWS1716).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 100IWS1718), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demo performance control process in embodiment 2)
As described above, in the second embodiment, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or the fact that the rescue time reduction is near is not indicated in principle. Therefore, although a telop indicating that the rescue time reduction function is provided is displayed based on the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command (see FIG. 14-26), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or the fact that the rescue time reduction is near is not indicated by the presence or absence of this telop display or the performance mode. In other words, in the second embodiment, a telop explaining the rescue time reduction is always displayed in a common mode based on the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command.

In the second embodiment, it may also be possible to indicate the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is approaching, depending on whether or not a caption display is executed and the presentation mode. However, during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction occurs (e.g., a period when the number of remaining changes is 10 or less), it is desirable to limit the execution of the caption display (e.g., to execute it less frequently or not at all) compared to the previous period. By configuring it in this way, the background image changes suddenly when the rescue time reduction occurs (i.e., a notification that time reduction control due to the rescue time reduction is about to begin), providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing interest.

(Variable display start setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, the variable display start setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 14-49 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

Figure 14-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution decision table and the preview performance mode decision table in Example 2. In step 108IWS802A of Example 2, regardless of the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 14-50 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance. In addition, if it is decided to execute the preview performance, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 14-50 (B) is used to decide the performance mode of the preview performance.

In Example 2, as shown in Figs. 14-50 (A) and (B), regardless of the number of remaining plays until the rescue time reduction, the execution of the preview effect and the presentation style when it is executed are determined by a common ratio. Also, in Example 2, similar to Example 1, when the rescue time reduction is reached and the game moves to the time reduction state C, the image display device 5 is configured to switch to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to the time reduction state C (the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction) (see step 078IWS638). With this configuration, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that the time reduction control by the rescue time reduction is about to begin) is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

As described above, in Example 2, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or the approaching rescue time reduction are not indicated in principle, so the processing for executing teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs, and the processing for displaying the initial result according to the number of changes until the rescue time reduction are omitted.

In the second embodiment, too, it may be possible to execute teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is activated. However, during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction is activated (e.g., a period when the number of remaining changes is 10 or less), it is desirable to limit the execution of teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects (e.g., execution rate is reduced, or they are not executed at all) compared to the previous period. By configuring in this way, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time reduction control due to the rescue time reduction is about to begin) is executed suddenly, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

As described above, in Example 2, the change display that results in rescue time reduction does not use a special change pattern for rescue time reduction, but rather uses a change pattern that is also used for change displays that do not result in rescue time reduction (for example, change pattern PA1-1 (normal change)). Therefore, in Example 2, processing for executing a time reduction entry effect or a time reduction appearance effect is omitted. With this configuration, for example, after the change display of change pattern PA1-1 (normal change) is performed, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time reduction control by rescue time reduction is about to begin) is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases interest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Performance execution timing in Example 2)
Next, a description will be given of the timing of execution of the performance when executing the variable display that is the rescue time reduction in the embodiment 2. FIG. 14-51 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of execution of the performance when executing the variable display that is the rescue time reduction in the embodiment 2.

As shown in FIG. 14-51, the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1) ends when the special pattern and decorative pattern variable display starts and the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a 0.5 second pattern determination period (see step 100IWS1137). Next, the variable display (see steps 100IWS74, S75) in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and results in the rescue time reduction also ends when the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed after the special pattern and decorative pattern variable display starts, as in the immediately preceding variable display, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a 0.5 second pattern determination period (see step 100IWS1137). Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed, the game moves to time-saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 14-51, the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see step 100IWS638). This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and prevent the presentation from becoming complicated. It can also clearly notify the player of the change in game state, which can increase the player's interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-51, during the period in which the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times) after transitioning to time-saving state C, a right-hit notification is executed (see FIG. 14-52 (C1)). This configuration makes it possible to make the player aware that the game state is one in which right-hits are to be performed while preventing the presentation related to the transition to time-saving state C from becoming complicated, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages to the player.

(Example of performance in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving in the second embodiment, will be described. Fig. 14-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Fig. 14-52, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In Example 2, as shown in FIG. 14-52(A), when the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction starts and the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 14-52(B), the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of the losing patterns.

Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display begins, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C1), the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification is executed.

In addition, if the reserved memory is not stored when the pattern determination period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C2), based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, the image display device 5 may switch to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification may be executed.

In addition, at the timings shown in Figs. 14-52 (C1) and (C2), explanations regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, explanations of the rescue time reduction function and the effects of the rescue time reduction) may be given using the telop display 100IW103 as shown in Figs. 14-37 (A) and (B). In addition, no effects are given indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is near, but the telop display 100IW103 as shown in Figs. 14-37 (A) and (B) may be displayed at any timing. Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in FIG. 14-52, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time-saving control through rescue time-saving will begin) is executed suddenly, providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing interest.

In addition, changes in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, increasing the interest when a rescue time-saving feature is established. In addition, the fluctuation patterns can be standardized before and after a rescue time-saving feature is established, reducing data volume.

The presentation mode until transition to time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving mode in Example 2, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 14-52. For example, it may be something like modified example 1 shown in FIG. 14-53 or modified example 2 shown in FIG. 14-53.

(Example of performance in the second embodiment [Modification 1])
FIG. 14-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the rescue time reduction in variant example 1 of embodiment 2.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 14-53, as shown in FIG. 14-53(A), when the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is stopped and then the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, as shown in FIG. 14-53(B), a time reduction entry effect (blackout effect) is executed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before.

Then, when the special pattern change time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, the blackout state is cleared and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of the missing patterns, as shown in FIG. 14-53 (C).

When the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display has begun, as shown in FIG. 14-53 (D), the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification is executed. Note that at the timing of FIG. 14-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image may be displayed or a sound effect may be output to notify that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) is about to begin.

This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 14-53 can be realized, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is displayed during the variable display start setting process.

(Example of performance in the second embodiment [Modification 2])
Figure 14-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the rescue time reduction in variant example 2 of embodiment 2.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 14-54, as shown in FIG. 14-54(A), the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 8 seconds) of the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 14-54(B), the decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed temporarily stopped in a combination of losing patterns on the image display device 5. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 14-54(B), the special pattern variable time has not elapsed, so the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed variable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-54(C), the image display device 5 executes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) that was displayed immediately before. Also, while the time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) is being executed, the special pattern variation time passes, and the small pattern 100IW101 is derived and displayed as a combination of losing patterns. The time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) continues to be executed during the pattern determination period.

When the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display has begun, as shown in FIG. 14-54(D), the blackout state is cleared on the image display device 5, and the background image is switched to one corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (in this example, a background image with an orange display color). Also, as shown in FIG. 14-54(D), a right-hit notification is executed.

This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 14-53 can be realized, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is displayed during the variable display start setting process.

In addition, at the timing of Figures 14-53(C), (D), Figures 14-54(C), (D), etc., explanations regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, explanations of the rescue time reduction function and the effects of the rescue time reduction) may be provided using the caption display 100IW103 as shown in Figures 14-37(A) and (B). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the above-described embodiment 1 of the characteristic part 108IW, in the period before the rescue time reduction (for example, the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less), the determination of the fluctuation pattern that will be a super reach and the determination of the execution of the preview performance are restricted, whereas in the embodiment 2, neither is restricted. However, by combining these, for example, in the period before the rescue time reduction (for example, the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) may be determined and a preview performance of a type with a low expectation among the preview performances may be executed. In other words, the determination of the fluctuation pattern that will be a super reach may be restricted, and the execution of a preview performance of a type with a high expectation among the preview performances may be restricted.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above, as a performance (also called a rescue suggestion performance) that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction or that the rescue time reduction is near, a provocative performance, a countdown performance, an effect performance, or an initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction or a caption display while waiting for customers (for example, the caption display 108IW101 shown in FIG. 14-26) is displayed, but is not limited to such a form. For example, at any timing during the fluctuation display or the fluctuation stop, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction or the rescue time reduction may be suggested by the execution frequency or execution mode of an action performance that operates the movable body 32, a light emission performance that causes a light-emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a specific mode (for example, to emit rainbow light), a vibration performance that vibrates the movable body 32, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, if the presentation control command sent when the power is turned on (for example, a presentation control command instructing recovery from a power outage or a presentation control command instructing initialization) cannot be received properly by the presentation control board 12 (for example, if a command is missed or garbled), normal presentation can be executed based on commands specifying the game state or commands specifying the variation pattern, but rescue suggestion presentations that indicate the number of variations remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is approaching may not be executed (note that they may be executed once a jackpot has occurred). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the player from getting their hopes up due to erroneous rescue suggestion presentations.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above, if the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (sent each time the variable display is executed in this example) that designates the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is not received properly, the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed only during the variable display when the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is not received properly, or the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed until the next big win occurs. Also, for example, if the command is not received properly, the rescue suggestion effect may be executed with a presentation mode or execution rate that suggests that there are many fluctuations remaining that will result in the rescue time reduction (i.e., the rescue time reduction is not close). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from getting hopeful due to an erroneous rescue suggestion effect.

In addition, the characteristic unit 108IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls to a big win game based on the variable display result, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration of controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic unit 108IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a role game that controls to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the role game during a small win game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples shown above, the number of times the time until the rescue time reduction occurs is fixed at 800, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear process is being executed or a jackpot has occurred, or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched randomly to "800" or "900".

In the characteristic portion 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, the time-saving flag C is set each time a rescue time-saving event occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the time-saving flag (fourth value) set for the second rescue time-saving event after a second transition may be different from the time-saving flag (third value) set for the first rescue time-saving event.

In the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, different effects (fluctuation patterns) are used for the time-saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time-saving state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the same effects (fluctuation patterns) may be used for the time-saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time-saving state. Specifically, the same notification (such as the notification in FIG. 14-39 (K) or a notification suggesting a future jackpot) may be given just before the end of the time-saving state after a jackpot and just before the start of the rescue time-saving state.

In the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, different effects (fluctuation patterns) are used for the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and the rescue time-saving function, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the same effects (fluctuation patterns) may be used for the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and the rescue time-saving function. Specifically, the same notification (such as the notification in FIG. 14-39 (K) or a notification suggesting a future jackpot) may be given just before the end of the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and just before the start of the rescue time-saving function.

As explained above, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1A) to (Means 8A).

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state) and a variable display The state control means is capable of controlling the numerical information to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a part that executes steps 100IWS75 and 100IWS76 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); a predetermined suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined suggestion performance (for example, a notice performance) when the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-49, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120); and a control means for notifying the user that control of a special state will be started based on the establishment of a special condition. The game device further includes a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a background image changes as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C1) and (C2), a blackout occurs when the fluctuation starts as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B), or a blackout occurs when the fluctuation ends as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C)) to notify the player of the occurrence of a certain condition (for example, a portion in which the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes step 100IWS638 as shown in FIG. 14-23), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, a portion in which the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes step 108IWS802A as shown in FIG. 14-44. See FIG. 14-50). With such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide a sense of surprise to the player, enhancing interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect when a variable display that meets a special condition is started, and the special notification effect is a form in which the effect display displayed on the display means before the special notification effect is started is made difficult to see (for example, blacking out when the variation starts, as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B)). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3A) Means 1A includes a variable display execution means for effecting, capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when the variable display that meets the special condition ends, and the special notification effect is in a form that makes the effect identification information difficult to see (e.g., blacking out when the variation ends, as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C)). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C1), a background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest. It can also prevent the effects from becoming cumbersome.

(Means 5A) Any of means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanation performance execution means capable of executing an explanation performance regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, at the timing shown in Fig. 14-52 (C1), (C2), Fig. 14-53 (D), and Fig. 14-54 (D), an explanation is given using a telop display 100IW103 as shown in Fig. 14-37 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) Any of means 1A to 5A includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-48) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is met, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is met (for example, variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display when the special condition is met. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state has been controlled due to the fulfillment of the special condition, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to means 6A, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a hold memory means (for example, a first hold memory number buffer and a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a backup memory means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means even when the power supply is stopped, an initialization means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process to initialize the memory contents of the backup memory means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a recovery means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) capable of executing a recovery process to restore the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means when power supply is started. With this configuration, control can be optimized through initialization processing, and disadvantages to players can be reduced when a power outage occurs in a situation where reserved memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before the power supply is stopped.

(Means 8A) In any of means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (e.g., the state of time-saving flags A to C) that can identify that the device is being controlled in a special state, an execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (e.g., the value of a time-saving count counter) that can identify the number of times a variable display has been executed in a special state, a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can retain the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even when power supply is stopped, and an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute an initialization process to initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and when the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information are retained by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, the initialization means initializes the special state information and the execution count information in the initialization process, but does not initialize the numerical information (e.g., initializes the state of time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter, but does not initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter (i.e., sets the value before power outage)). Such a configuration can prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, increasing the degree of relief available to the player.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1B) to (Means 5B).

(Means 1B) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and that has a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, the part executing step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100); the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where it is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-7(A) and (B), the variable display pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variable display pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are different from the case of a jackpot). In the case of a specific display result, the variable display pattern is more likely to be determined as a specific variable display pattern than a predetermined variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-7(A), the variable pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and the variable pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) are more likely to be determined in the case of a jackpot than the variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and in the case of a specific period before the special condition is established, the variable display pattern is less likely to be determined as a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result than in the period before the specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-8(F) and (G), the variable display pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and the variable pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) are less likely to be determined immediately before the rescue time reduction). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed even though a variable display by a specific variable display pattern is executed in the specified period before the special condition is established.

(Means 2B) Means 1B is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestive effect execution means executes suggestive effects more frequently in a predetermined period before the special condition is established than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS807 to S809, and also the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). Such a configuration makes the player look forward to the establishment of a special condition, increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage caused by ending the game just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) Means 1B or 2B is provided with an explanation performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) capable of executing an explanation performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (A) and (B)), regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, for example, providing an explanation using a telop display 100IW103). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any of means 1B to 3B, a notice performance execution means is provided that can execute a notice performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the notice performance execution means can execute a notice performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the notice performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result than when the specific display result is not the case, and the notice performance is executed less frequently when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result during a predetermined period before the special condition is established (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than during the period before the predetermined period (e.g., the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in FIG. 14-31. See FIG. 14-32 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a notice performance is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is established but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of means 1B to 4B, a preview performance execution means is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance using a specific mode (e.g., performance mode "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., performance mode "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the display result is not a specific display result, and the percentage of the preview performance being executed using the specific mode is higher when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result than when the predetermined mode is higher, and the percentage of the preview performance being executed using the specific mode is lower during a predetermined period before a special condition is established (e.g., a period when the remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than during the period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in Figure 14-31. See Figures 14-32 (C) and (D)). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is performed in a specific mode during a specified period before the special condition is met, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 8C) below.

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and a state control means that is controllable to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in Figure 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in Figure 14-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). The present invention is provided with an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13), and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern PA3-1 (entry miss)). The state control means determines whether the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, when a special condition is satisfied, the game can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS71 and 100IWS72). The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, but is not capable of determining a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, a portion that executes steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), and further includes a specific notification effect execution means that is capable of executing a specific notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a special state when a variable display using a special variable display pattern is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, a portion that executes step 108IWS806B in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIG. 14-38 (G) and (H)). With such a configuration, the player can be clearly notified that the game will be controlled to a special state due to the establishment of a special condition, and the player's interest when the special condition is established can be increased.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means is capable of executing a specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is equipped with a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect that notifies that a specific display result is derived and displayed after executing an effect in a common manner with the specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIGS. 14-41 (G') and (H')). With such a configuration, the player is notified that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state after once recognizing that a special condition is satisfied, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases interest.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a predetermined notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined notification effect (e.g., a full rotation effect) that notifies the player that a specific display result is derived and displayed in a manner that is not executed before the special condition is met. Such a configuration can provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and can increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect that notifies that the specific display result will be derived and displayed in the same manner as before the special condition is met (for example, even when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, this is realized by determining variable pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) or variable pattern PB2-3 (super reach β) in the same way as when the value is not 0). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when the special condition is met and before it is met, and data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the display period (e.g., 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is met is longer than the display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the display result of the variable display before the special condition is met (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135 as shown in FIG. 14-15; see FIG. 14-36), and a notification effect execution means (e.g., the part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS847 as shown in FIG. 14-33) capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that control of the special state is about to begin is provided. With such a configuration, a period for executing a notification effect in the normal state can be secured, and the effect can be clarified when switching the game state, and interest can be increased.

(Means 6C) Any of means 1C to 5C includes a signal output means for outputting a specific signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) corresponding to the start of a display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met, at the start of the display period, and outputting a special signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of the special state after outputting the specific signal (see, for example, FIG. 14-18). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the specific signal and the special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means outputs a special signal at the start of a special process (e.g., the next change postponement process shown in FIG. 14-45) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omissions externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to 6C, a first passing area (e.g., a first start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a path by hitting from the left) can pass through, a second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a special path (e.g., a path by hitting from the right) can pass through, and a variable display execution means (e.g., a part where the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, a variable display of a first identification information based on the first start condition being satisfied and a variable display of a second identification information based on the second start condition being satisfied) and a special output means capable of executing a special output capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward a special path (for example, outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which a right hit is expected, or an indication that a right hit is in progress), where the first start condition is established based on the gaming medium passing through the first passing area, the second start condition is established based on the gaming medium passing through the second passing area, and the special output means is capable of executing a special output at the start of a special process (for example, the next variable postponement process shown in FIG. 14-45) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established has elapsed. With such a configuration, a special output capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward a special path can be executed at an appropriate timing.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1D) to (Means 5D).

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) 14-13, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS71), and a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-48). The state control means determines whether or not a variable display pattern has been determined by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times that the variable display has been executed. When a special condition is satisfied, the game can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173, and The variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and further includes a special notification effect execution means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) that can execute a special notification effect (for example, display of a background image (orange) corresponding to a rescue time reduction) that notifies the player that control of the special state will begin after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, it is possible to commonize the variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity.

(Means 2D) Means 1D includes a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) in which the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means is the preview target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the preview target among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is the preview target (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702 as shown in Figure 14-27). Such a configuration can prevent the control process from becoming too complicated and also prevent inconsistencies from occurring in the presentation content.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 14-52 (C1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest, and also to prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any of means 1D to 3D is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect for a predetermined period before the special condition is established. With such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

(Means 5D) In any of means 1D to 4D, an explanation execution means is provided that can execute an explanation regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation is given using a telop display 100IW103 as shown in Fig. 14-37(A) and (B) at the timing shown in Fig. 14-52(C1), (C2), Fig. 14-53(D), and Fig. 14-54(D). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1E) to (Means 4E).

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means determines whether or not a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The game control means can control the game to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the game control means can control the game to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part in which steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part in which steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS17 in the game control microcomputer 100). 3), the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means determines the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, the part executing step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIG. 14-7(C) and FIG. 14-8(E)). With such a configuration, when the execution count of the variable display reaches a specific count, the variable display is executed with the shortened variable display pattern more frequently, and the period until the control to the next advantageous state is shortened, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and a variable display is executed. and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β)) that corresponds to the execution of a reach performance. The state control means determines a variable display pattern based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The game control means can control the game to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the game control means can control the game to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part in which steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part in which steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means determines the specific variable display pattern at a lower rate when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, the part executing step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIG. 14-7(C) and FIG. 14-8(E)). With such a configuration, when the execution count of the variable display reaches a specific count, the rate at which the display result of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern becomes a non-specific display result is reduced, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) Means 1E is provided with background display means (for example, a portion that executes steps 100IWS634, S638 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-23) that can display different background displays on the display means for the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met. With such a configuration, the difference in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or means 2E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold memory number buffer or a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) with the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means as the prediction target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means has a different ratio of executing the look-ahead prediction performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead prediction performances it executes between a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703 as shown in Figure 14-27. See Figures 14-28 (A) and (B)). With this configuration, the frequency and type of pre-reading preview effects can be made different between the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met, which can increase interest.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to means 3E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer or a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) in which the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means is the preview target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the preview target among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is the preview target (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702 as shown in Figure 14-27). This configuration makes it possible to avoid complicating the control process and to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation content.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1a) to (Means 10a).

(Means 1a) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71), and the state control means can control to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part executing steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the player can be rescued in an appropriate manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing the player's motivation to play.

In this example, the initial value is set to the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots that do not provide time reduction, jackpots that award a small number of game balls, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) may be provided, and the initial value of the rescue time reduction counter may not be set for some jackpots.

In this example, the first special symbol is mainly changed in the normal state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition may be configured to be established based on a predetermined display result (e.g., a losing pattern) different from the specific display result being derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as the display result of the variable display (for example, the part that executes steps 100IWS63, 100IWS71, 100IWS74, and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and the part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). With such a configuration, the player is relieved when a display result unfavorable to the player is derived and displayed in succession, so that a decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3a) In means 1a or 2a, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information when a variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) (e.g., a portion that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-17). Such a configuration can effectively realize rescue of the player. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and since the state can be controlled to the special state again even after it has been controlled to the special state, it is possible to control the state to the special state until it is effectively controlled to an advantageous state, which can reduce the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this example, the rescue time-saving count counter is updated in the low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (high probability state), and low probability high base (time-saving state), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time-saving count counter may be configured to be updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (high probability state), low probability high base (time-saving state), and high probability low base (latent high probability state). In this case, it is also applicable to a gaming machine that executes a lottery for falling to the normal state in the high probability state.

In this example, the second special symbol is consumed first, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B may be provided in the first start winning port, a high probability low base (small win rush) may be provided where small wins occur frequently, the balls may be consumed in the order they are won, and the first and second special symbols may change simultaneously.

In this example, a first special symbol and a second special symbol are provided, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the reel may be configured to only provide the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any of means 1a to 3a, the update means may be configured to set the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS144, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(Means 5a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition may be configured to be control to an advantageous state (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-16). With such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(Means 6a) In means 4a, the state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed (e.g., the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), and the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the part that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent excessive gambling.

(Means 7a) In Means 4a, the predetermined condition may be configured so that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS144 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is essentially possible to control the game to a special state until the next advantageous state, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 8a) Means 4a may be configured to include a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding the numerical information updated by the update means even when the power supply is stopped, and the update means may be configured to set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to an initial value when a specific condition is met (e.g., execution of an initialization process) (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-11, a portion that executes step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the specific condition is met (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-11, a portion that executes steps 100IWS8 and 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game center to operate, since if the numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game center, it may be too disadvantageous for the game center.

(Means 9a) In any of means 1a to 8a, a presentation control means corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100). 172), and can be controlled to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS172), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the part shown in variant 4 in FIG. 14-47). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed by taking measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display to change the presentation mode.

(Means 10a) In any of means 1a to 8a, a presentation control means corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100). The part that executes the above), and based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times in the special state, it is possible to control again to the special state for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 in FIG. 14-47). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by deliberately executing the same presentation, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware that the situation is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1b-1), (Means 1b-2) to (Means 5b).

(Means 1b-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a gaming area in which gaming media can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting right), and a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19). update means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of a variable display (for example, a portion executing step S100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13); and process execution means for updating a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of the variable display and control of the advantageous state, and executing a process corresponding to the data value (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, a portion executing step S100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13). 14-17, a portion which executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion which executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13), the processing execution means executes a first process relating to the variable display when the data value is a first numerical value (for example, a portion which executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, When the data value is a third value different from the first and second values, the state control means executes a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100). In the normal state, the game medium is fired to the first path to play, and in the special state, the game medium is fired to the second path to play, and a launch promotion notification means (see FIG. 14-46) is provided that issues a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be fired to the second path during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the special state is controlled, a performance related to the launch promotion notification can be executed early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that has a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a state control means that executes numerical information based on the execution of the variable display and a process execution means (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes a process corresponding to the data value. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13). the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 as shown in FIG. 14-17), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS67 as shown in FIG. 14-13), the processing execution means executes a first processing relating to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS75 as shown in FIG. 5). The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing steps S110 to S113, which executes a second process related to an advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first and second numerical values (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-43, a part that executes steps 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a presentation execution means (see FIG. 14-46) that executes a notification presentation that notifies the player that the game is being controlled to a special state during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the game is controlled to the special state, a presentation related to the launch promotion notification can be executed early when the game is controlled to the special state.

In this example, priority is given to processing related to the jackpot, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the system may be configured to prioritize processing related to the variable display or processing related to the rescue time reduction.

In this example, a right-hit notification is given in the third process, the next change postponement process, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the device may be configured to only execute a mode transition effect that suggests a transition to a time-saving state without giving a right-hit notification.

(Means 2b) In means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the process execution means may be configured to execute a second process after the first process when a specific display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed and step 100IWS114 is not executed). With such a configuration, priority is given to control of an advantageous state, so that a disadvantageous result is not reached for the player and a decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, means 1b-2 or means 2b, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information when variable display is started (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13), the processing execution means may be configured to change the special information from first information to second information when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), change the special information from second information to first information when the state control means controls to a special state (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-16), and execute different processing when the special information is the first information and when it is the second information (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-14). With this configuration, the process of transitioning to a special state can be executed optimally by managing the special information.

(Means 4b) Means 3b may include a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a different variable display pattern when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-14). With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

(Means 5b) Means 3b may include a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that determines a variable display pattern for the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, a portion that executes steps 100IWS1128 and 100IWS1130 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-15). With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown in (means 1c) to (means 6c) below.

(Means 1c) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means capable of controlling a game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a performance control means that controls a performance corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-31), and the gaming control means is a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19). The game control means includes a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a state information control means for controlling state information capable of specifying a state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-12, a part for executing step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100), and is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part for executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100). 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the status information control means sets the status information to a first numerical value in the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, i.e., neither the time-shortening flag A nor C is set, and the corresponding data is "0"), and sets the status information to a second numerical value when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state is controlled based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes step 100IWS537 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, i.e., the time-saving flag A is set and the data corresponding to the time-saving flag A is "1"), when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a special condition, the state information is set to a third value different from the first and second values (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, i.e., the time-saving flag C is set and the data corresponding to the time-saving flag C is "1"), the game control means is capable of transmitting specific information to the performance control means, and is capable of transmitting specific information according to the case where the state information is the second value or the third value when in a special state (for example, the part shown in FIG. 14-10, the part that executes step 100IWS540 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the microcomputer 100 for game control, as shown in FIG. 14-17). With such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, different game states can be easily identified, making control easier, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the presentation can be executed appropriately when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

In this example, a time-saving state A designation command or a time-saving state C designation command is sent as the specific information, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the background designation command or the variation pattern command may be configured to be sent in a manner that allows identification that the time-saving state is a jackpot, a time-saving state is a miss, or a time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state. Also, for example, when a jackpot is hit, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) may be sent in different modes depending on the game state, and the fanfare period or ending period may change depending on which command is received.

(Means 2c) In means 1c, the state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a fourth numerical value different from the first, second and third numerical values when a special condition is satisfied again after the state has been controlled to a special state based on the satisfaction of a special condition (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, control becomes easier because different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be executed when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

(Means 3c) In means 1c or 2c, the presentation control means may be configured to be able to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 is the part that executes steps 100IWS634, S638). With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 4c) In any of means 1c to 3c, the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result, and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS634 and 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

(Means 5c) In any of means 1c to 4c, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed (e.g., a portion that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (e.g., the presentation control CPU 120 is a portion that executes steps 100IWS636, S638). With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, and improving the interest of the game.

(Means 6c) In any of means 1c to 4c, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS636 and 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (means 1d) to (means 4d).

(Means 1d) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a game control means capable of controlling the game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a presentation control means that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-31), and The means include a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a portion executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a portion executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19), an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13), and a control means for controlling the number of times the variable display is executed when power supply is stopped (e.g., a portion executing step 100IWS72 in the game control microcomputer 100). and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the special number of times, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (e.g., a portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a portion that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), and the update means changes the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and the gaming control means can transmit predetermined information to the presentation control means when power supply is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can execute a suggestion presentation regarding the number of times the variable display is executed during a predetermined period after power supply is started based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22, the part that executes step 100IWS630 in the presentation control CPU 120). With such a configuration, even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be made possible. For example, players can be motivated to play from the opening of the gaming facility, which can increase the operating rate of the gaming machines.

In this example, the initial result is shown as a suggestion regarding the number of times the variable display will be executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to execute suggestion effects such as a change in the background, effects during the change up to 100 spins, or displays on the demo screen or menu screen.

When a command specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 14-12) is sent, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the rescue time reduction is reached as an initial value and execute the performance.

(Means 2d) In means 1d, the game control means may be configured to be able to transmit specific information capable of identifying the numerical information held in the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100). Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, this can motivate players to play from the opening of the gaming facility, thereby increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines and suppressing an increase in the processing burden.

In this example, a command capable of identifying the value of the rescue time reduction counter is sent upon recovery, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a command capable of identifying a predetermined range, such as 1 to 99 rotations in 100 rotation increments, 100 to 199 rotations, ... 500 to 599 rotations, may be sent, or a command may be sent that cannot identify rescue time reduction counter values of 128 or more, but can identify counter values of 127 or less.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the presentation control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, the part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can execute a special presentation related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the specific information may be configured to include first specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-9, the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-9, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command). Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complex. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to players, the risk of unknowingly inflicting losses can be reduced and processing of specific information can be efficiently achieved.

Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, is sent when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value, but this is not the only possible aspect. For example, it may be configured not to send the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value.

(Means 4d) In any of means 1d to 3d, the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestive presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the presentation control CPU 120, FIG. 14-39(I) to FIG. 14-40(M)), and to execute a suggestive presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the special number of variable displays are executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the presentation control CPU 120, FIG. 14-37(A) to FIG. 14-38(F)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced.

In this example, the presentation is executed based on the count value of the rescue time reduction counter, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of changes and execute the presentation after resetting the rescue time reduction counter.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1e-1) and (Means 1e-2).

(Means 1e-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means capable of controlling a game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a performance control means that controls a performance corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-31), and the gaming control means is a special state ( a state control means for controlling the variable display to a state in which the variable display is executed, for example, a time-shortened state (for example, a portion for executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a portion for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19); an update means for updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, a portion for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13); a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) for holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped; and an initialization means (e.g., a portion executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-14) capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means including information regarding the number of times the game has been derived and displayed successively. The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (e.g., a portion executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a portion executing steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). The update means is The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means executes different presentations when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 of FIG. 14-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as the estimation of setting values increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Means 1e-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means capable of controlling a game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a performance control means that controls a performance corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-31), and the gaming control means is a special state ( a state control means capable of controlling the variable display to a state in which the variable display is executed, for example, a time-shortened state (for example, a portion executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a portion executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19); an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13); a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when power supply is stopped; and a predetermined display result when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, and a special condition is established by the numerical information updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). The update means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, and a special condition is established by the numerical information updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means executes different presentations after being controlled to the special state when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 of FIG. 14-47). With such a configuration, even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to enable suitable control. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing the setting value increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

In this example, only fluctuation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to use multiple fluctuation pattern tables, just like after a jackpot.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (means 1f) to (means 15h) below may be applied.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed, and is equipped with a state control means that can control to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, the state control means is controllable to the special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and a special condition is established when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed. The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the plurality of advantageous states is controlled to, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when a special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the special advantageous state is a special jackpot, the specific advantageous state is a regular jackpot, the time-shortening state after the special jackpot time-shortening state is more advantageous than the time-shortening state after a regular jackpot, and the time-shortening state for the rescue time-shortening state is more advantageous than the time-shortening state after a regular jackpot.

(Means 2f) In means 1f, the rate at which the game is controlled to a special state with a special advantage degree after being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the variable display of the first identification information is triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, and the number of times the variable display is executed to establish a special condition is the same as the special number of times when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by providing different gameplay characteristics between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, while preventing excessive gambling from occurring due to the special number of times being the same between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the rate at which the special advantage level in the time-saving state after a jackpot (time-saving continues until the next jackpot) becomes different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of fluctuations of 800 times, which is the condition for controlling to the rescue time-saving state, is the same when controlling to a jackpot based on the first special pattern and when controlling to a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

(Means 3f) Means 1f or 2f is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state and an advantageous setting value having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state higher than the first probability, and the special condition is more likely to be established when the setting is the unfavorable setting value than when the setting is the advantageous setting value, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantageous degrees for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure the number of fluctuations that are the conditions for control to the rescue time reduction to be smaller when set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than when set to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so that the advantageous degree in the rescue time reduction is higher than the advantageous degree in the time reduction state after the jackpot. In addition, an unfavorable setting (e.g., "1") has a higher rate of achieving rescue time reduction than an advantageous setting (e.g., "6"), and the rescue time reduction is always 800 times the number of time reductions (effectively until the next jackpot), so it may be more advantageous than a time reduction state via a jackpot (e.g., after a normal jackpot, the number of time reductions is 100).

(Means 4f) Any of means 1f to 3f is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the player is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the player is controlled when a special condition is met is common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value that is set, and sound gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure it so that which of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled to after a jackpot is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in the rescue time-saving state is also the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 5f) In any of means 1f to 4f, the proportion of the advantageous states among the multiple types to which the game is controlled differs between when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is the same when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is the same regardless of which setting value is set, so that an appropriate degree of relief can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the ratios controlled for normal jackpots and special jackpots are made different when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, and the advantage of the rescue time reduction is the same when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the second special symbol.

(Means 6f) In any of means 1f to 5f, a variable display pattern determination means is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 6f is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of Figure 14-8 (E).

(Means 7f) Any of means 1f to 6f includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower rate of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 7f is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8 (E).

(Means 8f) In any of means 1f to 7f, the update means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on execution of a variable display in a special state, the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the special state is ended based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times in the special state, backup storage means can hold the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the update means and the setting information of the special information even if the power supply is stopped, and initialization means can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and the initialization means initializes the setting information and specific numerical information of the special information when the predetermined condition is met, and does not initialize the numerical information. With such a configuration, the degree of salvation of the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic section 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 8f may be configured, for example, to initialize the time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 14-11, but not to initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed, comprising: a state control means that can control to a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display; a variable display execution means that can execute a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition; a hold memory means that can store information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied; a backup memory means that can hold the numerical information and the hold information when power supply is stopped; and a backup memory means that can store the hold information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The game includes an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the backup storage means, and a restoration means capable of executing restoration control for restoring the numerical information updated by the update means and the reserved information stored in the reserved storage means based on the contents stored in the backup storage means when power supply is started, and the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored reserved information after the restoration control is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player while optimizing the control by initialization.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, when the initialization process is executed, the rescue time reduction counter and the reserved memory are reset, while when the power outage is restored, the rescue time reduction counter and the reserved memory are restored, and when the fluctuation display corresponding to the reserved memory at the time of restoration reaches the 800th fluctuation and the condition for control to the rescue time reduction is met, the rescue time reduction can be controlled.

(Means 2g) In means 1g, the rate at which the game is controlled to a special state with a special advantage degree after being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the variable display of the first identification information is triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, and the number of times the variable display is executed to establish a special condition is the same as the special number of times when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by providing different gameplay characteristics between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, while preventing excessive gambling from occurring due to the special number of times being the same between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the rate at which the special advantage level in the time-saving state after a jackpot (time-saving continues until the next jackpot) becomes different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of fluctuations that is the condition for control to the rescue time-saving state is the same when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special pattern and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special pattern.

(Means 3g) Means 1g or 2g is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state and an advantageous setting value having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state that is higher than the first probability, and the special condition is more likely to be established when the setting is unfavorable than when the setting is advantageous, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

To apply the gaming machine of means 3g to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure the number of changes until the rescue time reduction is started to be smaller for an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than for an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so that the degree of advantage in the rescue time reduction is higher than the degree of advantage in the time reduction state after the jackpot. In addition, an unfavorable setting (e.g., "1") is more likely to result in a miss than an advantageous setting (e.g., "6"), and therefore is more likely to result in a rescue time reduction, and the rescue time reduction is always 800 times (effectively until the next jackpot), so it may be more advantageous than a time reduction state via a jackpot (e.g., after a normal jackpot, the time reduction is 100 times).

(Means 4b) Any of means 1g to 3g is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the game is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the game is controlled when a special condition is met is common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value that is set, and sound gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure it so that which of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled to after a jackpot is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in the rescue time-saving state is also the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 5g) In any of means 1g to 4g, the proportion of the advantageous states among the multiple types to which the game is controlled differs between when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is the same when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is the same regardless of which setting value is set, so that an appropriate degree of relief can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the ratios controlled for normal jackpots and special jackpots are made different when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, and the advantage of the rescue time reduction is the same when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the second special symbol.

(Means 6g) Any of means 1g to 5g includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 6g is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8 (E).

(Means 7g) Any of means 1g to 6g includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower rate of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is met than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 7g is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8 (E).

(Means 8g) In any of means 1g to 7g, the update means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on execution of a variable display in a special state, the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the special state is ended based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times in the special state, backup storage means can hold the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the update means and the setting information of the special information even if the power supply is stopped, and initialization means can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and the initialization means initializes the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, and does not initialize the numerical information. With such a configuration, the degree of salvation of the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 8g may be configured, for example, to initialize the time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 14-11, but not to initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine that executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of a specific display result, includes a state control means that can control to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means can control to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means further includes a suggestive performance execution means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and can execute a suggestive performance related to the establishment of the special condition, and the suggestive performance execution means has a ratio of which of a plurality of performance modes is used to execute the suggestive performance depending on the number of times the variable display is executed, and the performance mode of the suggestive performance is a mode that suggests the period until the special condition is established. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to the performance mode of the suggestive performance, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1h to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is sufficient to configure it so that the ratio of whether or not to execute a countdown effect that indicates the number of fluctuations that is the condition for controlling the rescue time reduction is changed according to the count value of the rescue time reduction counter. Also, the gaming machine of means 1h can be realized by a configuration that determines whether or not to execute a caption display while waiting for customers and the presentation mode, using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-25.

(Means 2h) In means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is a mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met can be specified. With such a configuration, the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met can be clearly notified to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown presentation that indicates the number of fluctuations that will be the condition for controlling the rescue time reduction.

(Means 3h) In means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is an effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a number of different forms that differ in at least one of color and size, and the period until the suggested special condition is met differs depending on the form in which the specific image is displayed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the form of the specific image.

In this characteristic section 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 3h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-25 is used to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers and the presentation mode. In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3h, for example, the color and size of the countdown numbers in the countdown presentation image may be configured to differ depending on the count value of the rescue time-saving counter.

(Means 4h) Any of means 1h to 3h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved storage means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance when the predetermined image is displayed, and the rate at which suggestive performance is executed when the predetermined image is displayed varies depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance is executed, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 4h is configured to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers, for example, using the table shown in FIG. 14-25.

(Means 5h) Any of means 1h to 4h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance when the predetermined image is displayed, and the rate at which suggestive performance is executed in a predetermined manner when the predetermined image is displayed varies depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to the presence or absence of a suggested performance manner and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 5h is based on a configuration in which the presentation mode of the caption display while waiting for customers is determined using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-25.

(Means 6h) Any of means 1h to 5h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved storage means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance based on at least one of detecting that the operating means has been operated and that the gaming medium has passed through a predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. With such a configuration, a suggestive performance can be performed for a player who actually plays a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 6h to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, when the demo state is entered, if a gaming ball is detected by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or at the start hole, a caption indicating the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is executed is displayed.

(Means 7h) Any of means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means has a different rate of executing suggestive performance depending on which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the means 7h is configured to use the table shown in FIG. 14-25 to determine whether or not to display subtitles while passengers are waiting.

(Means 8h) Any of means 1h to 7h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means has a different rate of executing a suggestive performance in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the manner of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting a setting value.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the means 8h is configured to use the table shown in FIG. 14-25 to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers and the presentation mode.

(Means 9h) Any of means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value, the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means has a common rate of executing a suggestion effect regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestion effect is executed, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

To apply the gaming machine of means 9h to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is possible to set one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the setting value (for example, a performance in which the execution rate differs depending on the setting value), it is possible to configure it so that the execution rate of the caption display during waiting for customers is the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 10h) In any of means 1h to 6h and means 9h, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value, the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means has a common rate of executing a suggestion effect in a specific manner regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the aspect of the suggestion effect, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

To apply the gaming machine of means 10h to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is possible to set one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the setting value (for example, a performance with a different execution rate depending on the setting value), it is possible to configure it so that the execution rate of the caption display during customer waiting in the red performance mode is the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 11h) In any of means 1h to 10h, the suggestive performance execution means executes suggestive performances at a different rate in a specific period after the start of power supply depending on whether an initialization process is executed when power supply is started or whether a recovery process is executed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 11c to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is sufficient to configure the machine so that the rate at which the captions and countdown effects are displayed while customers are waiting differs between after the initialization process and after the power outage is restored.

(Means 12h) Any of means 1h to 11h includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, and further includes a specific notification effect execution means for executing a specific notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met and a variable display based on the special variable display pattern is being executed without determining a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met. With such a configuration, the player can be notified that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met, and the player can be clearly notified of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 12h is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the pattern table for the rescue time-saving variation miss shown in Figure 14-8 (I).

(Means 13h) Any of means 1h to 12h includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, and the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower in a predetermined period before a special condition is satisfied than in a period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 13h is based on a configuration that uses the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 14-8 (F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) Any of means 1h to 13h includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result than when it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed less frequently in a specified period before a special condition is established than in a period prior to the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 14h is configured to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-32.

(Means 15h) Any of means 1h to 14h includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in a specific manner and a predetermined manner in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the preview performance is executed more frequently in the specific manner than in the predetermined manner when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed less frequently in the specific manner during a predetermined period before a special condition is established than during a period prior to the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 15h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the performance mode.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning port 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 13 ... Sound control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal pattern display device 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I/O
120 ... Performance control CPU
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state for a player by performing variable display of performance identification information,
An operation means operable by a player;
A performance control means capable of executing a performance,
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect can be executed after the reach effect is started,
a predetermined vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to a start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed and a second timing prior to the start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed;
A special vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means during a specific effect period, which is an execution period of the specific effect.
A light emitting effect can be executed in which the operation means is illuminated in the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect,
As the special vibration effect,
A first special vibration effect corresponding to the operation of a movable body for effect different from the operation means can be executed at a timing when the specific effect is started during the specific effect period,
A second special vibration effect corresponding to the image display during the specific effect period can be executed,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed;
The predetermined vibration effect and the first special vibration effect have different aspects,
The predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects,
The first special vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects,
The performance control means is capable of executing the light-emitting performance by a common light-emitting mode at the first timing and the second timing,
The light emission performance accompanying the execution of the first special vibration performance and the light emission performance accompanying the execution of the second special vibration performance have different light emission modes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images